advertisement
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 1
ESPAÑOL FRANÇAIS ENGLISH
AV Pre Tuner
AV7005
2010/08/23 18:31:54
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 2 2010/08/23 18:31:54
n SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
3. Heed all warnings.
4. Follow all instructions.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with dry cloth.
7. Do not block any ventilation openings.
Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/ apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
15. Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.
CAUTION:
To completely disconnect this product from the mains, disconnect the plug from the wall socket outlet.
The mains plug is used to completely interrupt the power supply to the unit and must be within easy access by the user.
PRECAUTION:
Pour déconnecter complètement ce produit du courant secteur, débranchez la prise de la prise murale.
La prise secteur est utilisée pour couper complètement l’alimentation de l’appareil et l’utilisateur doit pouvoir y accéder facilement.
PRECAUCIÓN:
Para desconectar completamente este producto de la alimentación eléctrica, desconecte el enchufe del enchufe de la pared.
El enchufe de la alimentación eléctrica se utiliza para interrumpir por completo el suministro de alimentación eléctrica a la unidad y debe de encontrarse en un lugar al que el usuario tenga fácil acceso.
FCC INFORMATION (For US customers)
1. COMPLIANCE INFORMATION
Product Name: AV Pre Tuner
Model Number: AV7005
This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this product may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this product must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Marantz America, Inc.
(a D & M Holdings Company)
100 Corporate Drive,
Mahwah, NJ, 07430, U.S.A.
Tel. (630) 741-0300
2. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modification not expressly approved by Marantz may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
3. IMPORTANT
When connecting this product to network hub or router, use only shielded
STP or ScTP LAN cables which is available at retailer.
Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
4. NOTE
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This product generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the product OFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
For Canadian customers:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
I
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 1 2010/08/23 18:31:54
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS n NOTES ON USE / OBSERVATIONS RELATIVES A L’UTILISATION / NOTAS SOBRE EL USO
WARNINGS
• Avoid high temperatures.
Allow for sufficient heat dispersion when installed in a rack.
• Handle the power cord carefully.
Hold the plug when unplugging the cord.
• Keep the unit free from moisture, water, and dust.
• Unplug the power cord when not using the unit for long periods of time.
• Do not obstruct the ventilation holes.
• Do not let foreign objects into the unit.
• Do not let insecticides, benzene, and thinner come in contact with the unit.
• Never disassemble or modify the unit in any way.
• Ventilation should not be impeded by covering the ventilation openings with items, such as newspapers, tablecloths or curtains.
• Naked flame sources such as lighted candles should not be placed on the unit.
• Observe and follow local regulations regarding battery disposal.
• Do not expose the unit to dripping or splashing fluids.
• Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on the unit.
• Do not handle the mains cord with wet hands.
• When the switch is in the OFF position, the equipment is not completely switched off from
MAINS.
• The equipment shall be installed near the power supply so that the power supply is easily accessible.
AVERTISSEMENTS
• Eviter des températures élevées.
Tenir compte d’une dispersion de chaleur suffisante lors de l’installation sur une étagère.
• Manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec précaution.
Tenir la prise lors du débranchement du cordon.
• Protéger l’appareil contre l’humidité, l’eau et la poussière.
• Débrancher le cordon d’alimentation lorsque l’appareil n’est pas utilisé pendant de longues périodes.
• Ne pas obstruer les trous d’aération.
• Ne pas laisser des objets étrangers dans l’appareil.
• Ne pas mettre en contact des insecticides, du benzène et un diluant avec l’appareil.
• Ne jamais démonter ou modifier l’appareil d’une manière ou d’une autre.
• Ne pas recouvrir les orifices de ventilation avec des objets tels que des journaux, nappes ou rideaux. Cela entraverait la ventilation.
• Ne jamais placer de flamme nue sur l’appareil, notamment des bougies allumées.
• Veillez à respecter les lois en vigueur lorsque vous jetez les piles usagées.
• L’appareil ne doit pas être exposé à l’eau ou à l’humidité.
• Ne pas poser d’objet contenant du liquide, par exemple un vase, sur l’appareil.
• Ne pas manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec les mains mouillées.
• Lorsque l’interrupteur est sur la position OFF, l’appareil n’est pas complètement déconnecté du
SECTEUR (MAINS).
• L’appareil sera installé près de la source d’alimentation, de sorte que cette dernière soit facilement accessible.
ADVERTENCIAS
• Evite altas temperaturas.
Permite la suficiente dispersión del calor cuando está instalado en la consola.
• Maneje el cordón de energía con cuidado.
Sostenga el enchufe cuando desconecte el cordón de energía.
• Mantenga el equipo libre de humedad, agua y polvo.
• Desconecte el cordón de energía cuando no utilice el equipo por mucho tiempo.
• No obstruya los orificios de ventilación.
• No deje objetos extraños dentro del equipo.
• No permita el contacto de insecticidas, gasolina y diluyentes con el equipo.
• Nunca desarme o modifique el equipo de ninguna manera.
• La ventilación no debe quedar obstruida por haberse cubierto las aperturas con objetos como periódicos, manteles o cortinas.
• No deberán colocarse sobre el aparato fuentes inflamables sin protección, como velas encendidas.
• A la hora de deshacerse de las pilas, respete la normativa para el cuidado del medio ambiente.
• No exponer el aparato al goteo o salpicaduras cuando se utilice.
• No colocar sobre el aparato objetos llenos de líquido, como jarros.
• No maneje el cable de alimentación con las manos mojadas.
• Cuando el interruptor está en la posición OFF, el equipo no está completamente desconectado de la alimentación MAINS.
• El equipo se instalará cerca de la fuente de alimentación de manera que resulte fácil acceder a ella.
n CAUTIONS ON INSTALLATION
PRÉCAUTIONS D’INSTALLATION
EMPLAZAMIENTO DE LA INSTALACIÓN z z z z
Wall
Paroi
Pared z For proper heat dispersal, do not install this unit in a confined space, such as a bookcase or similar enclosure.
• More than 0.3 m (12 in.) is recommended.
• Do not place any other equipment on this unit.
z Pour permettre la dissipation de chaleur requise, n’installez pas cette unité dans un espace confiné tel qu’une bibliothèque ou un endroit similaire.
• Une distance de plus de 0,3 m (12 po) est recommandée.
• Ne placez aucun matériel sur cet appareil.
z Para la dispersión del calor adecuadamente, no instale este equipo en un lugar confinado tal como una librería o unidad similar.
• Se recomienda dejar más de 0,3 m (12 pulg.) alrededor.
• No coloque ningún otro equipo sobre la unidad.
II
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 2 2010/08/23 18:31:55
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO
Getting started
Thank you for purchasing this Marantz product. To ensure proper operation, please read this user guide carefully before using the product.
After reading them, be sure to keep them for future reference.
Contents
Getting started ··············································································1
Accessories ··················································································2
About this manual ·········································································2
Features ························································································2
Cautions on handling ····································································3
Simple version (Simple setup guide)
··························4
Basic version
··········································································13
Connections ·················································································14
Important information ·································································14
Connecting an HDMI-compatible device ····································15
Connecting a TV··········································································17
Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player ················································17
Connecting a DVD player ····························································18
Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) ····················18
Connecting a video cassette recorder ········································19
Connecting a digital camcorder ··················································19
Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port ·····20
Connecting a CD player ······························································20
Connecting a CD recorder ··························································21
Connecting a record player ·························································21
Connecting an antenna ·······························································22
Connecting a wireless receiver (RX101) ·····································23
Connect a device that has a multichannel output terminal ·········23
Connecting to a home network (LAN) ········································24
Playback (Basic operation) ·························································25
Important information ·································································25
Playing a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player ····································26
Playing a CD player ·····································································26
Playing an iPod® ·········································································27
Playing a USB memory device ····················································28
Tuning in radio stations ·······························································30
Playing a network audio ······························································34
Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode) ··························44
Multi-channel playback ·······························································44
Stereo playback ··········································································46
Direct playback ···········································································46
Dolby Virtual Speaker/Dolby Headphone playback ·····················46
Advanced version
·······························································47
Speaker installation/connection (Advanced connection) ·······48
Install ··························································································48
Connect ······················································································49
Set up speakers ··········································································52
Connections (Advanced connection)·········································53
REMOTE CONTROL jacks ··························································53
RS-232C connector ·····································································54
DC OUT (TRIGGER OUT) jacks ···················································54
Playback (Advanced operation) ·················································55
Convenient functions ··································································55
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room) ··························61
Audio output ···············································································61
Video output ···············································································62
Playback ······················································································62
How to make detailed settings ··················································63
Menu map ··················································································63
Examples of menu and front display ··········································64
Inputting characters ···································································65
Input Setup ·················································································66
Audio/Video Adjust ·····································································72
Manual Setup··············································································77
Information ·················································································88
Other settings ··············································································89
Remote control settings ·····························································89
Switches light illumination on/off ···············································89
Operating the connected devices by remote control unit ······90
Operating AV equipment ····························································90
Registering preset codes ····························································91
Operating components ·······························································92
Operating learn function ·····························································93
Operating macro function ···························································95
Setting the back light ··································································96
FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Information
·············································································97
Part names and functions···························································98
Front panel ··················································································98
Display ························································································99
Rear panel ·················································································100
Remote control unit ··································································101
Other information ·····································································103
Trademark information ······························································103
Surround ···················································································104
Relationship between video signals and monitor output ··········108
Explanation of terms ·································································109
Troubleshooting ········································································112
Resetting the microprocessor ··················································115
Specifications ············································································116
List of preset codes
··································End of this manual
1
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 1 2010/08/23 18:31:55
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS
Accessories
Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.
q User guide ............................................................................... 1 w Warranty card (for USA) .......................................................... 1 e Warranty card (for CANADA) ................................................... 1 r Power cord .............................................................................. 1 t Remote control unit (RC011SR) .............................................. 1 y R03/AAA batteries ................................................................... 2 u Setup microphone (ACM1H) ................................................... 1 i AM loop antenna (for HD Radio broadcasts) ........................... 1 o FM indoor antenna (for HD Radio broadcasts) ........................ 1
ITALIANO
Features
ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Current feedback amplifi er
This unit uses a high-speed current feedback amplifi er circuit for its preamplifi er so that signals from a Blu-ray Disc player and other equipment that support high-defi nition audio formats can be amplifi ed with high fi delity. The high-speed current feedback amplifi er also reproduces a natural sound space.
r i t o u
Supports HDMI 1.4a with 3D, ARC, Deep Color, x.v.Color , Auto Lipsync and HDMI control function
This unit can output 3D video signals input from a Blu-ray Disc player to a TV that supports a 3D system. This unit also supports the ARC (Audio Return Channel) function, which reproduces TV sound with this unit via an HDMI cable used for connecting the unit and a TV z 1. z 1 The TV should support the ARC function.
About this manual
n
Operation buttons
The operations described in this guide are based mainly on remote control operation.
n
Symbols
v
NOTE
This symbol indicates a reference page on which related information is described.
This symbol indicates a supplementary information and tips for operations.
This symbol indicates a supplementary information and tips for operations.
Internet radio, music and photo streaming via network z 2
This unit can playback audio fi les and still images such as photographs that are stored on your computer via a network. You can also listen to internet radio and a whole host of other online music z 3 that uses network technology.
z 2 An internet connection is required.
z 3 You may be required to sign a service agreement with the companies that provide particular services.
6-HDMI inputs and 2-outputs
The unit is equipped with 6 HDMI input connectors for connecting devices with HDMI connectors, such as a Blu-ray Disc player, game machine, HD video camera, etc.
One of the 6 input connectors of this unit is provided on the front panel so that you can easily connect and display images and videos recorded in a digital still camera or digital video camera.
Audyssey DSX™
This unit is equipped with Audyssey DSX decoder. By connecting front height speakers to the power amp and using Audyssey DSX playback, you can experience a more power playback expression in the height audio range. By connecting front wide speakers, you can experience a more powerful playback expression in the wide audio range.
Easy to use, Graphical User Interface
This unit is equipped with an easy to see “Graphical User
Interface” that uses menu displays and levels. The use of level displays increases operability of the unit.
All sources are up-scaled to 1080p
The unit is provided with an HDMI video up-scaling function that converts an analog video signal input to the unit to a 1080p (HD resolution) signal and supplies it to a TV via the HDMI connector.
This enables the unit and a TV connected with a single HDMI cable and any video source to be reproduced precisely with HD level of quality.
Direct play for iPod® and iPhone® via USB
Music data from an iPod can be played back if you connect the
USB cable supplied with the iPod via the USB port of this unit, and also an iPod can be controlled with the remote control unit for this unit.
M-XPort (Marantz-eXtension Port)
This unit is equipped with the M-XPort, a Marantz original innovation that provides outstanding expandability. You can connect the
Wireless Receiver RX101 (sold separately) to this port. n
Illustrations
Note that the illustrations in these instructions are for explanation purposes and may differ from the actual unit.
High defi nition audio support
The unit is equipped with a decoder which supports high-quality digital audio format for Blu-ray Disc players such as Dolby TrueHD,
DTS-HD Master Audio, etc.
UNBALANCED PRE OUT terminal for front height channel
This unit is equipped with a dedicated UNBALANCED PRE OUT terminal on the rear panel. You can enjoy 7.1-channel playback using the front height channel and 7.1-channel playback using the surround back channel, without having to reconnect the speakers.
2
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 2 2010/08/23 18:31:57
Other features
• Dolby Virtual Speaker (vpage 46)
• Dolby Headphone (vpage 46)
• DTS Neural Surround (vpage 45)
Features
Remote Power Control
This unit is equipped with a remote power control function. When a Marantz Power Amplifi er MM8003 or MM7055 or MM7025 is connected to this unit, this unit’s power can be switched ON/OFF together with the MM8003 or MM7055 or MM7025 power supply.
Connection to the MM8003 or MM7055 or MM7025 is a ground fl oating connection that prevents negative infl uences on sound quality as far as possible.
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO
Cautions on handling
• Before turning the power switch on
Check once again that all connections are correct and that there are no problems with the connection cables.
• Power is supplied to some of the circuitry even when the unit is set to the standby mode. When going on vacation or leaving home for long periods of time, be sure to unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
• About condensation
If there is a major difference in temperature between the inside of the unit and the surroundings, condensation (dew) may form on the operating parts inside the unit, causing the unit not to operate properly.
If this happens, let the unit sit for an hour or two with the power turned off and wait until there is little difference in temperature before using the unit.
• Cautions on using mobile phones
Using a mobile phone near this unit may result in noise. If that occurs, move the mobile phone away from this unit when it is in use.
• Moving the unit
Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Next, disconnect the connection cables to other system units before moving the unit.
• About Care
• Wipe the cabinet and control panel clean with a soft cloth.
• Follow the instructions when using a chemical cleaner.
• Benzene, paint thinner or other organic solvents as well as insecticide may cause material changes and discoloration if brought into contact with the unit, and should therefore not be used.
FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 3
3
2010/08/23 18:31:57
ENGLISH
Simple version
DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Simple version (Simple setup guide)
Here, we explain the entire setup procedure, from unboxing the unit to using it in a home theater.
The “Simple version” section provides the speaker installation, connection, and setup methods for the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers. For the installing, connecting, and setup methods of speakers other than the 7.1-channel system (with surround back speakers), see page 48.
n
Before connecting the unit, turn off the power to all devices.
n
For operation of the connected devices, refer to the user manuals for each device.
1
Install
(vpage 5)
2
Connect
(vpage 5)
3
Turn on power
(vpage 7)
4
Set up speakers
(vpage 8)
5
Play back disc
(vpage 12)
4
Enjoy better audio, using the correct install method.
Connect 7.1-channel speakers, a TV and
Blu-ray Disc player equipped with an HDMI connector.
Set up speakers (Audyssey® Auto Setup)
STEP 1
Preparation
STEP 2
Speaker
Detection
STEP 3
Measurement
STEP 4
Calculation
Use the setup microphone
(ACM1H) included with the product, for automatic setup.
Enjoy Blu-ray Disc and DVD in surround sound.
STEP 5
Check
STEP 6
Store Finish
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 4 2010/08/23 18:31:59
1
Install
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
1 2 3 4 5
2
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO
Connect
FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
1 2 3 4 5
This unit can perform 2.0/2.1 to 7.1-channel surround playback.
This page provides the speaker installation procedure for the
7.1-channel playback using surround back speakers as an example.
The default setting is 7.1-channel. You can also perform 5.1-channel playback.
To perform 5.1-channel playback, connect5.1-channel speakers only.
Use Audyssey Auto Setup function of this unit to automatically detect the number of connected speakers and perform optimal settings for the speakers to be used.
Power amp
• Connect a power amp (sold separately) to the PRE OUT terminal of this unit.
• This unit has an UNBALANCED PRE OUT terminal and BALANCED PRE OUT terminal. Connect to the correct terminal for your power amp.
• Connect the speakers to the power amp.
• For details on speaker connections, see the User Guide for the power amp.
FL
SW
FR
C
90 – 110˚
22 – 30˚
135 – 150˚
SL SR
SBL
Listening position
SBR
FL Front speaker (L)
FR Front speaker (R)
C Center speaker
SW Subwoofer
SL Surround speaker (L)
SR Surround speaker (R)
SBL Surround back speaker (L)
SBR Surround back speaker (R)
• Install the surround speakers in a position 2 to
3 ft (60 to 90 cm) higher than ear level.
Front speaker
Surround speaker
2 – 3 ft /
60 – 90 cm
Surround back speaker
• Point slightly downwards
G Viewed from the sideH
The “Simple version” section provides the speaker installation, connection, and setup methods for the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers.
For the installing, connecting, and setup methods of speakers other than the 7.1-channel system (with surround back speakers), see page 48.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 5
5
2010/08/23 18:32:00
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO
Connect n
Example of connections to Marantz MM7055 and MM7025 power amp
Connecting the unbalanced PRE OUT terminal
ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Connecting the balanced PRE OUT terminal
Audio cable
(sold separately)
Audio cable
(sold separately)
6
G MM7025H
G MM7055H
SL
G MM7025H
FL
SW
Subwoofer with built-in amplifier
C
FR
SBL
SR
SBR
Speaker cables
(sold separately)
G MM7055H
SL
FL
SW
Subwoofer with built-in amplifier
C
FR
SBL
SR
SBR
Speaker cables
(sold separately)
G AV7005 XLR connector PIN
arrangementH
1 2
3 q GND (Ground) w HOT (Hot) e COLD (Cold)
The PIN arrangement in this device uses the European method.
In the USA method, is HOT.
w is COLD, and e
When connecting a device that utilizes the USA type of PIN arrangement, replace the w and e balanced cable.
plugs on one side of the
NOTE
Do not short the HOT and GND or COLD and GND for use.
The “Simple version” section provides the speaker installation, connection, and setup methods for the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers.
For the installing, connecting, and setup methods of speakers other than the 7.1-channel system (with surround back speakers), see page 48.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 6 2010/08/23 18:32:03
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
Connect 3
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS
Turn on power
Blu-ray Disc player and TV
Use only an HDMI (High Defi nition Multimedia Interface) cable that bears the HDMI logo (a genuine HDMI product). Using a cable without the HDMI logo (a non-genuine
HDMI product) may result in abnormal playback.
When outputting Deep Color or 1080p, etc., we recommend you use a “High Speed
HDMI cable” or a “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet”for enhanced high-quality playback.
TV
1 Turn on the TV and subwoofer power.
Blu-ray Disc player
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
IN
Power on
2 Change the TV input to the input of this unit.
3 Press ON to turn on power to the unit.
The power indicator switches off, and power is supplied to the unit.
Power on
HDMI cable
(sold separately)
HDMI cable
(sold separately)
DEUTSCH ENGLISH
1 2 3 4 5
Power on
To household power outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
Power cord
(supplied)
NOTE
• Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed.
• Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in humming or noise.
4 Turn on the power amp power.
NOTE
Before you use the remote control unit for the fi rst time, be sure to insert the batteries (vpage 102
“Inserting the batteries”).
7
2010/08/23 18:32:07 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 7
4
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS
Set up speakers (Audyssey® Auto Setup)
SVENSKA
1 2 3 4 5
The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically. This is called “Audyssey Auto Setup”.
To perform measurement, place the setup microphone in multiple locations all around the listening area. For best results, we recommend you measure in six or more positions, as shown in the illustration (up to eight positions).
• When performing Audyssey Auto Setup, MultEQ® XT/
Dynamic EQ®/Dynamic Volume® functions become active
(vpage 74, 75).
• To set up the speakers manually, use “Speaker Setup”
(vpage 78) on the menu.
About setup microphone placement
• Measurements are performed by placing the setup microphone successively at multiple positions throughout the entire listening area, as shown in
G Example qH. For best results, we recommend you measure in six or more positions, as shown in the illustration (up to eight positions).
• Even if the listening environment is small as shown in GExample wH, measuring at multiple points throughout the listening environment results in more effective correction.
G Example qH
FL SW C FR
G Example wH
FL SW C FR
( : Measuring positions) ( : Measuring positions)
NOTE
• Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt the room measurements. Close windows, silence cell phones, televisions, radios, air conditioners, fl uorescent lights, home appliances, light dimmers, or other devices as measurements may be affected by these sounds.
• Cell phones should be placed away from all audio electronics during the measurement process as Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) may cause measurement disruptions (even if the cell phone is not in use).
• Do not unplug the setup microphone from the main unit until Audyssey Auto
Setup is completed.
• Do not stand between the speakers and setup microphone or allow obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. This will cause inaccurate readings.
• Loud test sounds may be played during Audyssey
Auto setup. This is part of normal operation. If there is background noise in room, these test signals will increase in volume.
• Operating VOLUME +, – during the measurements will cancel the measurements.
• Measurement cannot be performed when headphones are connected.
SL *M
SBL
FL Front speaker (L)
FR Front speaker (R)
C Center speaker
SW Subwoofer
SBR
SR SL *M
SBL SBR
SL Surround speaker (L)
SR Surround speaker (R)
SBL Surround back speaker (L)
SBR Surround back speaker (R)
SR
About the main listening position (*M)
The main listening position is the position where listeners would normally sit or where one would normally sit alone within the listening environment. Before starting Audyssey Auto Setup, place the setup microphone in the main listening position. Audyssey MultEQ® XT uses the measurements from this position to calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.
1
Prepare the setup microphone
Mount the setup microphone on a tripod or stand and place it in the main listening position.
When placing the setup microphone, adjust the height of the sound receptor to the level of the listener’s ear.
Sound receptor
Setup microphone
NOTE
• Do not hold the setup microphone in your hand during measurements.
• Avoid placing the setup microphone close to a seat back or wall as sound refl ections may give inaccurate results.
8
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 8
The “Simple version” section provides the speaker installation, connection, and setup methods for the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers.
For the installing, connecting, and setup methods of speakers other than the 7.1-channel system (with surround back speakers), see page 48.
2010/08/23 18:32:08
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Set up speakers (Audyssey® Auto Setup)
2
Set up the subwoofer
If using a subwoofer capable of the following adjustments, set up the subwoofer as shown below.
n When using a subwoofer with a direct mode
Set the direct mode to “On” and disable the volume adjustment and crossover frequency setting.
n When using a subwoofer without a direct mode
Make the following settings:
• Volume : “12 o’clock position”
• Crossover frequency : “Maximum/Highest
Frequency”
• Low pass fi lter : “Off”
• Standby mode : “Off”
NOTE
When you use two subwoofers, please adjust the subwoofer volume controls individually so that each subwoofer level is as close as possible to 75 dB using the test tone (vpage 79) before
Audyssey Auto Setup.
3
Set up the remote control unit
n Set up the operation mode
Press AMP to set the remote control unit to amplifi er operation mode.
STEP 1
Preparation
4 Connect the setup microphone to the
SETUP MIC jack of this unit.
When the setup microphone is connected, the following screen is displayed.
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
STEP1 Preparation
Connect the speakers and place them according to the recommendations in the manual.
Set the following items if necessary.
Amp Assign
Channel Select
Auto Setup Start
ENTER Enter
Start Auto Setup
MultEQ XT
RETURN
[1/6]
Cancel
This screen provides the method for setting up 7.1-channel playback using surround back speakers. For the method of setting up speakers other than the 7.1-channel system, select “Amp
Assign” and perform step 3 and 4 of “Set up
“Amp Assign”” (vpage 52).
If unused channels are set with “Channel
Select”, measuring time can be shortened. For setting, perform steps 5 to 9 of “Set up “Channel
Select”” (vpage 52).
5 Use ui to select “Auto Setup Start” and then press ENTER .
STEP 2
Speaker Detection
• In STEP 2, you will perform measurements at the main listening position.
• This step automatically checks the speaker confi guration and speaker size, and calculates the channel level, distance, and crossover frequency.
It also corrects distortion in the listening area.
6 Select “Measure” and then press
ENTER .
When measuring begins, a test tone is output from each speaker.
• Measurement requires several minutes.
7 The detected speakers are displayed.
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
STEP2 Spkr Detect Check
Front
Center
Subwoofer
Surround
S.Back
F.Height
F.Wide
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2spkrs
No
No
Retry
Next Measurement
MultEQ XT
[2/6]
ENTER Enter RETURN
Go to Step 3 (Measurement) after speaker check
Cancel
NOTE
If “Caution” is displayed:
Go to “Error messages” (vpage 11), check any related items, and perform the necessary procedures.
If the problem is resolved, return and restart
“Audyssey Auto Setup”.
When performing Audyssey Auto
Setup over again
Press ui to select “Retry”, and then press ENTER .
When measuring has stopped
Press RETURN , to the “Cancel Auto Setup?” prompt is displayed.
Press o to select “Yes”, then press ENTER .
Setting up the speakers again
Repeat the operation from step 4 of
STEP1 Preparation .
NOTE
If a connected speaker is not displayed, the speaker may not be connected correctly. Check the speaker connection.
8 Use ui to select “Next 1
Measurement” and then press ENTER .
Press AMP
Remote control operation buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confi rm the setting Return to previous menu
9
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 9 2010/08/23 18:32:08
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS
Set up speakers (Audyssey® Auto Setup)
STEP 3
Measurement
ITALIANO
STEP 4
Calculation
ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS
STEP 5
Check
SVENSKA
STEP 6
Store
• In STEP 3, you will perform measurements at multiple positions (two to eight positions) other than the main listening position.
• You can achieve a more effective correction of distortion within the listening area by performing measurements at multiple positions.
9 Move the setup microphone to position 2, use ui to select
“Measure”, and then press ENTER .
The measurement of the second position starts. Measurements can be made in up to eight positions.
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
STEP3 Measurement
Please place the microphone at ear height at 2nd listening position.
MultEQ XT
[3/6]
11
On the STEP3 screen, use ui
to select “Next 1 Calculation”, and then press ENTER .
Measuring results are analyzed, and the frequency response of each speaker in the listening room is determined.
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
STEP4 Calculation
Now calculating...
Please wait.
MultEQ XT
[4/6]
25%
Measure
Next Calculation
ENTER Enter RETURN
Start next measurement. Test Tone will start
Cancel
• Analysis takes several minutes to complete. The time required for this analysis depends on the number of speakers connected.
The more connected speakers there are, the longer it takes to perform analysis.
If you want to omit measurements from the next position onward, select “Next 1 Calculation”.
(Go to STEP4 Calculation )
10 Repeat step 9, measuring positions 3 to 8.
When measurement of position 8 is completed, a “Measurements fi nished.” message is displayed.
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
STEP3 Measurement
Measurements finished.
MultEQ XT
[3/6]
12 Use ui to select the item you want to check, and then press ENTER .
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
STEP5 Check
Check processing results. To proceed,press
“Next”
Spkr Config Check
Distance Check
Ch. Level Check
Crossover Check
Next Store
Select item to check
ENTER Enter
MultEQ XT
RETURN
[5/6]
Cancel
• Subwoofers may measure a greater reported distance than the actual distance due to added electrical delay common in subwoofers.
• If you want to check another item, press
RETURN .
13 Use ui to select “Next 1 Store” and then press ENTER .
14 Select “Store” and then press
Save the measurement results.
ENTER .
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP MultEQ XT
STEP6 Store
Press “Store” to store calculation results.
[6/6]
Store
ENTER Enter
Apply and store measurement result
RETURN Cancel
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
STEP6 Store
Now storing...
Please wait.
25%
MultEQ XT
[6/6]
NOTE
• If the result differs from the actual connection status, or if “Caution!” is displayed, see “Error messages” (vpage 11). Then carry out Audyssey
Auto Setup again.
• If the result still differs from the actual connection status after remeasurement or the error message still appears, it is possible that the speakers are not connected properly. Turn this unit off, check the speaker connections and repeat the measurement process from the beginning.
• If you change speaker positions or orientation, perform Audyssey Auto Setup again to fi nd the optimal equalizer settings.
• Saving the results requires about 10 seconds.
• If the measuring results are not to be saved, press RETURN . A message “Cancel Auto
Setup?” will be displayed. Press o then select
“Yes”. All the measured Audyssey Auto Setup data will be erased.
NOTE
During saving of measurement results, be sure not to turn off the power.
10
Retry
Next Calculation
ENTER
Proceed to Step 4 (Analyze)
Enter RETURN Cancel
Remote control operation buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confi rm the setting Return to previous menu
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 10 2010/08/23 18:32:09
Set up speakers (Audyssey® Auto Setup)
Finish
15
16
Unplug the setup microphone from the unit’s SETUP MIC jack.
Set Dynamic Volume®.
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
Finish
Storing complete.
Auto Setup is now finished. Please unplug microphone.
Turn on Dynamic Volume?
Yes No
MultEQ XT
[6/6]
ENTER Exit
Turn Dynamic Volume on and exit Auto Setup
• For details of Dynamic Volume settings, see page 75.
n When turning Dynamic Volume on
Use o to select “Yes“, and then press ENTER .
• The unit automatically enters “Heavy” mode.
n When turning Dynamic Volume off
Use p to select “No“, and then press ENTER .
NOTE
After performing Audyssey Auto Setup, do not change the speaker connections or subwoofer volume. In event of a change, perform Audyssey
Auto Setup again.
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
Error messages
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
An error message is displayed if Audyssey® Auto Setup could not be completed due to speaker placement, the measurement environment, etc. If this happens, check the relevant items, be sure to take the necessary measures, then perform Audyssey Auto Setup over again.
NOTE
Be sure to turn off the power before checking speaker connections.
Examples
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP MultEQ XT
Caution!
No microphone or Speaker
Error details
• The connected setup microphone is broken, or a device other than the supplied setup microphone is connected.
• Not all speakers could be detected.
• The front L speaker was not properly detected.
Measures
• Connect the included setup microphone to the
SETUP MIC jack of this unit.
• Check the speaker connections.
Retry
RETURN Cancel
Check cause of problem!
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP MultEQ XT
Caution!
Ambient noise is too high or Level is too low
Check cause of problem!
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
Front R
Caution!
None
Retry
Retry
RETURN Cancel
MultEQ XT
• There is too much noise in the room for accurate measurements to be made.
• Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low for accurate measurements to be made.
• Either turn off any device generating noise or move it away.
• Perform again when the surroundings are quieter.
• Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the speakers are facing.
• Adjust the subwoofer’s volume.
• The displayed speaker could not be detected.
• Check the connections of the displayed speaker.
RETURN Cancel
Check cause of problem!
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
Front L
Caution!
Phase
MultEQ XT
• The displayed is connected with the polarities reversed.
• Check the polarities of the displayed speaker.
• For some speakers, this error message may be displayed even if the speaker is properly connected.
If you are sure the connection is correct, press ui to select “Skip”, then press ENTER .
Retry
Skip
Check cause of problem!
RETURN Cancel
Remote control operation buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confi rm the setting Return to previous menu
11
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 11 2010/08/23 18:32:09
ENGLISH DEUTSCH
Parameter Check
FRANÇAIS
This function enables you to check the measurement results and equalizer characteristics after Audyssey Auto Setup.
1 Use ui to select “Parameter Check” and then press ENTER or p .
2 Use ui to select the item you want to check, then press ENTER or p .
Measurement results for each speaker are displayed.
AUTO SETUP
PARAMETER CHECK
Speaker Config Check
Distance Check
Channel Level Check
Crossover Check
EQ Check
Restore
Show speaker configuration result
Check the speaker confi guration.
Speaker Confi g. Check
Check the distance.
Distance Check
Check the channel level.
Channel Level Check
Check the crossover frequency.
Crossover Check
Check the equalizer.
EQ Check
• If “EQ Check” is selected in step 2, press ui to select equalizing curve (“Audyssey” or “Audyssey Flat”) to be checked.
Use o p to switch the display between the different speakers.
3 Press RETURN .
The confi rmation screen reappears. Repeat steps 2.
ITALIANO
5
ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS
Play back disc
SVENSKA
1 Press BD two times in a row to switch an input source for a player used for playback.
2 Play the component connected to this unit.
Make the necessary settings on the player (language setting, subtitles setting, etc.) beforehand.
3 Adjust the sound volume.
VOLUME + ..................................... Volume up
VOLUME – ................................ Volume down
MUTE .................................................. Muting
4 Set the listening mode.
Set the listening mode according to the playback contents
(cinema, music, etc.) or according to your liking (vpage 44
“Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode)”).
When power is switched to standby
Press STANDBY .
G Power indicator status in standby modeH
• Normal standby : Red
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “ON” :
Orange
• When “Network Standby” is set to “ON” :
Orange
You can also switch the power to standby by pressing ON/STANDBY on the main unit.
1 2 3 4 5
NOTE
During power standby, a minimal amount of power is consumed. To totally cut off the power, remove the power cord from the power outlet.
Retrieving Audyssey Auto Setup settings
If you set “Restore” to “Yes”, you can return to Audyssey Auto Setup measurement result (value calculated at the start by MultEQ® XT) even when you have changed each setting manually.
12
Remote control operation buttons
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 12
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confi rm the setting Return to previous menu
2010/08/23 18:32:10
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 13
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH
Basic version
Basic version
Here, we explain the connections and basic operation methods for this unit.
ENGLISH
F
Connections vpage 14
F
Playback (Basic operation) vpage 25
F
Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode) vpage 44
n
Refer to the pages indicated below for information on connecting and playing back the various media and external devices.
Audio and Video
TV
Blu-ray Disc player
DVD player
Video cassette recorder
Set-top box (Satellite tuner or cable TV)
Game console
Digital camcorder
Audio iPod®
USB memory device
CD player
CD recorder
Record player
SIRIUS satellite radio
HD Radio receiver
Wireless receiver (RX101)
Network
Network
Connection v page 16, 17 v page 16, 17 v page 16, 18 v page 16, 19 v page 16, 18 v page 16 v page 19
Connection v page 20 v page 20 v page 20 v page 21 v page 21 v page 22 v page 22 v page 23
Connection v page 24
Playback
– v page 26 v page 26
–
–
–
–
Playback v page 27 v page 28 v page 26
–
– v page 30 v page 32
–
Playback v page 34
For speaker connections, see page 5.
13
2010/08/23 18:32:10
ENGLISH DEUTSCH
Connections
FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Important information
• Make connections as follows before using this unit. Select an appropriate connection type according to the components to be connected.
• You may need to make some settings on this unit depending on the connection method. Refer to each description for more information.
• Select the cables (sold separately) according to the components being connected.
NOTE
• Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed.
• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components being connected.
• Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly (left with left, right with right).
• Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in noise.
Converting input video signals for output
(Video conversion function)
This unit is equipped with three types of video input connectors (HDMI, Component video and video) and three types of video output connectors (HDMI, Component video and video).
Use the connectors corresponding to the components to be connected.
This function automatically converts various formats of video signals input to this unit into the formats used to output the video signals from this unit to a monitor.
G Flow of video signals for MAIN ZONEH
This unit
Video device
Monitor
Output
HDMI connector
Component video connectors
Input
(IN)
HDMI connector
Component video connectors
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
HDMI connector
Component video connectors
Input
HDMI connector
Component video connectors
Video device
Output
Component video connectors
Video connector
G Flow of video signals for ZONE2H
This unit
Input
(IN)
Component video connectors
Video connector in Set as Necessary
• Set when not using the video conversion function.
“Video Convert” (vpage 70)
• Set when changing the resolution of the video signal.
“Resolution” (vpage 70)
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Component video connectors (OUT2/ZONE2)
Video connector
Monitor
Input
Component video connectors
Video connector
• The video conversion function supports the NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC 4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and PAL-60 formats.
• The resolution of the video signal input to this unit’s HDMI connector is the one set at “Resolution”
(vpage 70). (1080p HDMI signals and 1080p component signals are output at 1080p, regardless of the setting.)
• Resolutions of HDMI-compatible TVs can be checked at “HDMI Monitor 1 Information” or “HDMI
Monitor 2 Information” (vpage 88).
NOTE
• HDMI signals cannot be converted into analog signals.
• When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion function might not operate.
• Component video input signals cannot be converted into Video format.
• A menu is output via the HDMI connector or component video connector.
• When using component output terminal 2 for ZONE2 video signal output, set “Input Setup” – “Input
Assign” – “Component” (vpage 69) in the menu to “ZONE2”.
Video connector Video connector Video connector Video connector
14
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 14 2010/08/23 18:32:10
Examples of screen display
• Menu screen • Status display screen
When the input source is switched
MENU
Audio/Video Adjust
Information
Auto Setup
Manual Setup
Input Setup
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
Important information
When the volume is adjusted
Adjust various audio and video parameters
Input
Mode
BD
STEREO
Auto Master Volume -80.0dB
Status display: The operating status appears briefly on the screen when the input source is switched or the volume is changed.
NOTE
• If you operate the menu while playing back 3D video content, the playback video is replaced by the menu screen. The playback video is not displayed behind the menu screen.
• This unit does not show the status display while playing back 3D video content.
Connecting an HDMI-compatible device
You can connect up to six HDMI-compatible devices to the unit.
HDMI function
This unit supports the following HDMI functions:
• 3D
• Deep Color (vpage 109)
• Auto Lip Sync (vpage 80, 109)
• x.v.Color, sYCC601 color, Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color (vpage 109, 111)
• High definition digital audio format
• ARC (Audio Return Channel)
• Content Type
• CEC (HDMI control)
Copyright protection system
In order to play back digital video and audio such as BD-Video or DVD-Video via HDMI connection, both this unit and TV or the player need to support the copyright protection system known as HDCP (Highbandwidth Digital Content Protection System). HDCP is copyright protection technology comprised of data encryption and authentication of the connected AV device. This unit supports HDCP.
• If a device that does not support HDCP is connected, video and audio are not output correctly. Read the user guide of your television or player for more information.
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
About HDMI cables
• When a device supporting Deep Color signal transfer is connected, use a cable compatible “High Speed
HDMI cable” or “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet”.
• When the ARC function is used, connect a device with a ”Standard HDMI cable with Ethernet” or “High
Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet” for HDMI 1.4a.
HDMI control function (vpage 55)
This function allows you to operate external devices from this unit and operate this unit from external devices.
NOTE
• The HDMI control function may not work depending on the device it is connected to and its settings.
• You cannot operate a TV or Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player that is not compatible with the HDMI control function.
About 3D function
This unit supports input and output of 3D (3 dimensional) video signals of the HDMI 1.4a standards.
For playing the 3D video content, a player, and a TV that support the 3D function of the HDMI 1.4a standards are required in addition to this unit.
NOTE
• If you operate the menu while playing back 3D video content, the playback video is replaced by the menu screen. The playback video is not displayed behind the menu screen.
• This unit does not show the status display while playing back 3D video content.
About ARC (Audio Return Channel) function
The Audio Return Channel in HDMI 1.4a enables a TV, via a single HDMI cable, to send audio data “upstream” to this unit.
NOTE
• To enable the ARC function, set “HDMI Control” to “ON” (vpage 80).
• ARC function is only supported for the HDMI OUT 1 connector. In order to use the ARC function, connect the television to the HDMI OUT 1 connector.
• When connecting a TV that does not support the ARC function, a separate connection using an audio cable is required. In this case, refer to “Connecting a TV” (vpage 17) for the connection method.
About Content Type
The HDMI specification version 1.4a enables simple, automated picture setting selection with no user intervention.
NOTE
To enable the Content Type, set “Video Mode” to “Auto” (vpage 70).
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 15
15
2010/08/23 18:32:10
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS
Connecting an HDMI-compatible device
Cables used for connections
Audio and video cable (sold separately)
HDMI cable
ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
• This interface allows transfer of digital video signals and digital audio signals over a single HDMI cable.
Blu-ray
Disc player
DVD player
Set-top box
Video cassette recorder
Game console TV 1 TV 2
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
IN
HDMI
IN
Digital camcorder
HDMI
OUT
G Rear panelH
G Front panelH
NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
• When this unit is connected to other devices with HDMI cables, connect this unit and TV also with an
HDMI cable.
• When connecting a device that supports Deep Color transmission, please use a “High Speed HDMI cable” or “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet”.
• Video signals are not output if the input video signals do not match the monitor’s resolution. In this case, switch the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player’s resolution to a resolution with which the monitor is compatible.
• When this unit and monitor are connected with an HDMI cable, if the monitor is not compatible with
HDMI audio signal playback, only the video signals are output to the monitor.
NOTE
• The HDMI signal is not simultaneously output to HDMI 1 and HDMI 2. Select the connector that you want to use in advance using “Monitor Out” (vpage 80) in the menu, or by pressing the HDMI
HDMI OUT button on the main unit.
button on the remote control unit or the
• HDMI control function is only supported for the HDMI OUT 1 connector. In order to use the HDMI control function, connect the television to the HDMI OUT 1 connector.
• The audio signal from the HDMI output connector (sampling frequency, number of channels, etc.) may be limited by the HDMI audio specifications of the connected device regarding permissible inputs.
• The front panel HDMI input connector is displayed as “HDMI6” in the “Input
Setup” – “Input Assign” (vpage 68) in the menu.
Connecting to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector
When an HDMI/DVI conversion cable (sold separately) is used, the HDMI video signals are converted to
DVI signals, allowing connection to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector.
NOTE
• No sound is output when connected to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector. Make separate audio connections.
• Signals cannot be output to DVI-D devices that do not support HDCP.
• Depending on the combination of devices, the video signals may not be output.
n
Settings related to HDMI connections
Set as necessary. For details, see the respective reference pages.
Input Assign (vpage 68)
Set this to change the HDMI input connector to which the input source is assigned.
HDMI Setup (vpage 80)
Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.
• RGB Range • Auto Lip Sync
• HDMI Control • Standby Source
• HDMI Audio Out
• Power Off Control
• Monitor Out
NOTE
The audio signals output from the HDMI connectors are only the HDMI input signals.
16
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 16 2010/08/23 18:32:12
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
Connecting a TV
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
• For video connections, see “Converting input video signals for output (Video conversion function)”
(vpage 14).
• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage 15).
To listen to TV audio through this device, use the optical digital connection.
NOTE
This connection is not required when a TV compatible with the ARC function (Audio Return Channel (HDMI
1.4a standard function) is connected to this unit via an HDMI connection.
For details, see “About ARC (Audio Return Channel) function” (vpage 15) or refer to the instruction manual for your TV.
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
Video cable (Yellow)
Component video cable
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
Y
P
B
P
R
Audio cable (sold separately)
Y
P
B
P
R
Optical cable
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player
• You can enjoy video and audio from a Blu-ray Disc.
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage 15).
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
Video cable (Yellow)
Component video cable
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
Y
P
B
P
R
Audio cables (sold separately)
Y
P
B
P
R
Audio cable
(White)
(Red)
L
R
L
R
Blu-ray Disc player
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT
Y P B P R
VIDEO
OUT
AUDIO
AUDIO
L
OUT
R
L R
TV
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
IN
P
B
P
R
VIDEO
IN
AUDIO
OPTICAL
OUT
L R in Set as Necessary
Set this to change the digital input connector or component video input connector to which the input source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage 68)
For HD audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, Dolby Digital Plus and DTS Express) playback, connect with HDMI
(vpage 15 “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device”).
in Set as Necessary
Set this to change the digital input connector to which the input source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage 68)
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 17
17
2010/08/23 18:32:15
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
Connecting a DVD player
• You can enjoy video and audio from a DVD.
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage 15).
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
Video cable (Yellow)
Component video cable
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
Y
P
B
P
R
Audio cables (sold separately)
Y
P
B
P
R
Audio cable
(White)
(Red)
L
R
L
R
Coaxial digital cable
(Black)
DVD player
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
OUT
P B P R
VIDEO
OUT
AUDIO
L
OUT
R
AUDIO
COAXIAL
OUT
NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)
• You can watch satellite or cable TV.
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage 15).
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
Video cable (Yellow)
Component video cable
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
Y
P
B
P
R
Audio cables (sold separately)
Y
P
B
P
R
Audio cable
(White)
(Red)
L
R
L
R
Coaxial digital cable
(Black)
Satellite tuner/Cable TV
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
OUT
P
B
P
R
VIDEO
OUT
AUDIO
COAXIAL
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
L R
L R
L R
L R
L R in Set as Necessary
Set this to change the digital input connector or component video input connector to which the input source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage 68) in Set as Necessary
Set this to change the digital input connector or component video input connector to which the input source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage 68)
18
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 18 2010/08/23 18:32:19
Connecting a video cassette recorder
• You can record video onto a video cassette tape.
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
• When recording analog audio, use the analog connection.
• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMIcompatible device” (vpage 15).
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
Video cable (Yellow)
Component video cable
Audio cable
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
Y
P
B
P
R
Audio cable (sold separately)
(White)
(Red)
L
R
Y
P
B
P
R
L
R
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO in Set as Necessary
Set this to change the digital input connector or component video input connector to which the input source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage 68)
NOTE
To record video signals through this unit, use the same type of video cable for connection between this unit and the player as used for connection between this unit and the recorder.
FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Connecting a digital camcorder
• You can enjoy video and audio from a digital camcorder.
• You can enjoy games by connecting a game machine via the AUX1 input connector. In this case, select the input source to “AUX1”.
• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMIcompatible device” (vpage 15).
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
Video cable (Yellow)
Audio cable (sold separately)
Audio cable
(White)
(Red)
L
R
L
R
Optical cable
Video cassette recorder
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
OUT
P
B
P
R
VIDEO
OUT
AUDIO
AUDIO
L
OUT
R
VIDEO
VIDEO
IN
AUDIO
AUDIO
IN
L R
Digital camcorder
VIDEO
VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
AUDIO
AUDIO
OUT
L R
L R
L R L R
L R
L R L R in Set as Necessary
Set this to change the digital input connector to which the input source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage 68)
The front panel OPTICAL input terminal is displayed as “OPT3” in the
“Input Setup” – “Input Assign” setting (vpage 68) in the menu.
NOTE
When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion function might not operate. In this case, use the monitor output of the same connector as the input.
19
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 19 2010/08/23 18:32:22
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port
You can enjoy music stored on an iPod or USB memory device.
Cables used for connections
To connect an iPod to this unit, use the USB cable supplied with the iPod.
USB memory device or iPod
Supported iPod models
Made for
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
• iPod classic
• iPod with video
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPod nano (2nd generation)
• iPod nano (1st generation)
• iPhone
• iPhone 3G
• iPhone 3GS
NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Connecting a CD player
• You can enjoy CD sound.
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
Cables used for connections
Audio cable (sold separately)
Audio cable
(White)
(Red)
L
R
Optical cable
L
R
CD player
AUDIO
AUDIO
L
OUT
R
OPTICAL
OUT
L R
L R
Marantz does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a portable USB connection type HDD of the kind to which an AC adapter can be connected to supply power, use the AC adapter.
NOTE
• USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
• Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory device. This may cause radio interference with other devices.
in Set as Necessary
Set this to change the digital input connector to which the input source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage 68)
20
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 20 2010/08/23 18:32:25
SVENSKA
Connecting a CD recorder
• You can record audio on a CD or cassette tape.
• Select the connector to use and connect the device.
• When recording analog audio, use the analog connection.
Cables used for connections
Audio cable (sold separately)
Audio cable
(White)
(Red)
L
R
Optical cable
L
R
CD recorder
AUDIO
AUDIO
L
OUT
R
OPTICAL
OUT
OPTICAL
IN
AUDIO
AUDIO
IN
L R
NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS
Connecting a record player
You can enjoy playing records.
Cables used for connections
Audio cable (sold separately)
Audio cable
(White)
(Red)
L
R
L
R
Turntable (MM cartridge)
L R L R
AUDIO
OUT
L R
GND
L R L R
DEUTSCH ENGLISH in Set as Necessary
Set this to change the digital input connector to which the input source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage 68)
To perform digital recording using the digital connector (OPT OUT), assign either one of the digital input connectors to “CDR” by selecting “Input Setup” – “Input Assign” setting (vpage 68).
The above figure shows an example of changing the assignment of OPT1 connector to “CDR”.
• This unit is compatible with record players with an MM cartridge. When you connect to a record player with an MC cartridge, use a commercially available MC head amp or a step-up transformer.
• When you increase the volume without connecting the record player, there may be “booming” noise from the speakers.
NOTE
The SIGNAL GND terminal of this unit is not a safety ground connection. Connect it to reduce noise when noise is excessive. Note that depending on the record player, connecting the ground line may have the reverse effect of increasing noise. In this case, it is not necessary to connect the ground line.
21
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 21 2010/08/23 18:32:27
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO
Connecting an antenna
Connecting a SIRIUS connector
• This unit is a SIRIUS Satellite Radio Ready® receiver. You can receive SIRIUS® Satellite Radio by connecting to the SiriusConnect
Home Tuner and subscribing to the SIRIUS service.
• Plug the SIRIUS connector on the SIRIUS service.
• Position the Home Tuner antenna near a south-facing window to receive the best signal.
For details, see “Listening to SIRIUS satellite radio” (vpage 30).
When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the SiriusConnect Home Tuner.
SiriusConnect Home Tuner
ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
NOTE
Keep the power cord unplugged until the SiriusConnect Home Tuner connection have been completed.
n
Positioning the antenna
For a consistent satellite signal, the antenna must be positioned correctly. Use the following map to determine which area you are in and position the antenna accordingly.
NORTH
SKY
Connecting an HD Radio receiver
• By connecting a HD Radio antenna to this unit, you can receive
HD Radio programs.
• HD Radio broadcasting currentry is available in the United States and select other countries.
Direction of broadcasting station
FM outdoor antenna
AM loop antenna
(for HD Radio broadcasting, supplied)
• To prevent interference, install at least 3.3 ft/1 m away from the antenna connected to the this unit’s other AM tuner terminal.
When connecting digital audio
WEST q t w e r
EAST
HORIZON
SOUTH
Area 1 Point the antenna toward the sky in the east, northeast, or
southeast, either through a window or outside.
Area 2 Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or northeast, either through a window or outside.
Area 3 Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or northwest, either through a window or outside.
Area 4 Point the antenna toward the sky in the west, northwest, or
southwest, either through a window or outside.
Area 5 Put the antenna outside and point it straight up. The antenna cannot be used indoors.
75 Ω coaxial cable
FM indoor antenna (for
HD Radio broadcasting, supplied) q
Black
White
Ground w e
AM outdoor antenna in Set as Necessary
When connecting digital of the SiriusConnect Home Tuner, perform the setting “Digital”.
“Input Assign” (vpage 68)
22
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 22 2010/08/23 18:32:31
Connecting an antenna n
AM loop antenna assembly
1 Put the stand section through the bottom of the loop antenna from the rear and bend it forward.
Loop antenna
2 Insert the projecting part into the square hole in the stand.
Stand
Square hole
Projecting part
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO
Connecting a wireless receiver
(RX101)
By connecting a wireless receiver RX101 (sold separately) to this unit, you can receive and playback audio signals from other devices using the Bluetooth Communication Function.
• Use a Bluetooth device that is A2DP compatible (vpage 109
“A2DP”).
• You can also use wireless receiver RX101 as an external IR receiver.
• For instructions on the wireless receiver settings, refer to the
RX101’s operating instructions.
Wireless receiver RX101
FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Connect a device that has a multichannel output terminal
• You can connect this unit to an external device fitted with multichannel sound audio output jacks to enjoy music and video.
• The video signal can be connected in the same way as a Blu-ray Disc player / DVD player (vpage 17 “Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player”).
Cables used for connections
Audio cable (sold separately)
Audio cable
(White)
(Red)
L
R
L
R
Audio cable n
Using the AM loop antenna
Suspending on a wall
Suspend directly on a wall without assembling.
Blu-ray Disc player / DVD player /
External decoder
SUB-
WOOFER
FRONT
AUDIO
CENTER SURROUND
L R L R
SURROUND
BACK
L R
L R L R L R
Nail, tack, etc.
Standing alone
Use the procedure shown above to assemble.
Bluetooth device
(A2DP Compatibility)
L R L R L R
NOTE
• Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously.
• Even if an external AM antenna is used, do not disconnect the AM loop antenna.
• Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the panel.
• If the signal has noise interference, connect the ground terminal
(GND) to reduce noise.
• If you are unable to receive a good broadcast signal, we recommend installing an outdoor antenna. For details, inquire at the retail store where you purchased the unit.
Remote control unit
You can enjoy listening to music by connecting a wireless receiver via the M-XPort input connector. In this case, set the input source to
“M-XPort”.
NOTE
To use wireless receiver RX101 as external IR receiver, set the remote sensor function of this unit to “Remote Lock:ON” (vpage 89
“Remote control settings”).
in Set as Necessary
To play analog signals input from 7.1CH INPUT terminals, set
“Input Mode” (vpage 71) to “7.1CH IN”.
“7.1CH IN” can also be selected with A/D on the remote control unit.
When a device is connected to the SBL/SBR terminal of 7.1CH INPUT terminals, set “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) to “Normal”.
23
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 23 2010/08/23 18:32:32
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO
Connecting to a home network (LAN)
• This unit lets you play via your home network (LAN) music files stored on a computer and music content such as that from Internet radio.
You can also operate this unit from a computer using the Web control function.
• You can update by downloading the latest firmware from the
Marantz website.
For more information, on the menu, select “Firmware Update”
(vpage 86).
• See “Network Setup” on the menu (vpage 81) for more information on network setting.
Cables used for connections
Cable (sold separately)
Ethernet cable
Internet
Modem
Computer
ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Required system
n
Broadband internet connection
n
Modem
Device that connects to the broadband circuit and conducts communications on the Internet.
A type that is integrated with a router is also available.
n
Router
When using this unit, we recommend you use a router equipped with the following functions:
• Built-in DHCP server
This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.
• Built-in 100BASE-TX switch
When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater.
n
Ethernet cable (CAT-5 or greater recommended)
• Use only shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable which is available at retailer.
• Some flat type Ethernet cables are easily affected by noise.
We recommend using a normal type cable.
NOTE
• A contract with an ISP is required to connect to the Internet.
No additional contract is needed if you already have a broadband connection to the Internet.
• The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact an
ISP or a computer shop for details.
• Marantz assumes no responsibility whatsoever for any communication errors or troubles resulting from customer’s network environment or connected devices.
• This unit is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE-compatible router is required if you have a contract for a type of line set by PPPoE.
• Do not connect an NETWORK connector directly to the LAN port/
Ethernet connector on your computer.
Router
To WAN side
To LAN port
To LAN port
LAN port/
Ethernet connector
• If you have an Internet provider contract for a line on which network settings are made manually, make the settings at “Network Setup”
(vpage 81).
• With this unit, it is possible to use the DHCP and Auto IP functions to make the network settings automatically.
• When using this unit with the broadband router’s DHCP function enabled, this unit automatically performs the IP address setting and other settings.
When using this unit connected to a network with no DHCP function, make the settings for the IP address, etc., at “Network
Setup” (vpage 81).
• When setting manually, check the setting contents with the network administrator.
For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet
Service Provider) or a computer shop.
24
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 24 2010/08/23 18:32:33
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Playback (Basic operation)
n Selecting the input source (vpage 25) n Adjusting the master volume (vpage 26) n Turning off the sound temporarily (vpage 26) n Playing a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player
(vpage 26) n Playing a CD player (vpage 26) n Playing an iPod® (vpage 27) n Playing a USB memory device (vpage 28) n Tuning in radio stations (vpage 30) n Playing a network audio (vpage 34)
Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode)
(vpage 44)
Playback (Advanced operation) (vpage 55)
Important information
Before starting playback, make the connections between the different components and the settings on this unit.
NOTE
Also refer to the operating instructions of the connected components when playing them.
Selecting the input source
(
Press the input source select button
BD , DVD , VCR , SAT , GAME , AUX1 ,
NET/USB , TV , CD , CDR , SATR , TUNE ,
M-XP ) twice to play back that source.
The desired input source can be selected directly.
• Select input source “PHONO” to play back music from a record player connected to the PHONO input connector.
• Select the input source “PHONO” using one of the following methods.
q “Source select ” menu (“Using the “Source Select” menu” provided on the right) w INPUT df on the remote control unit (“Operating the remote control unit” provided on the right) e INPUT SELECTOR knob on the main unit (“Operating the main unit” provided on the right)
• Select input source “SIRIUS” with SATR button.
• When using with an iPod connected directly to the USB port of this unit, select “ (NET/USB)” for the input source.
• Input sources that are not going to be used can be set ahead of time.
Make this setting at “Source Delete” (vpage 84).
• To turn off the source selection menu without selecting an input source, press SOURCE SEL again.
n
Using the button on the remote control unit
Press INPUT df .
• When INPUT df is pressed, the input source is switched in the order shown below.
n
Using the “Source Select” menu
q Press AMP and the press SOURCE SEL .
Display the “Source Select” menu.
q Source Select :Flickr
Recent Source
The currently selected input source is highlighted.
w
Select
ENTER Enter n
BD
M-XPort
DVD VCR
HD Radio
SAT
SIRIUS
GAME
PHONO
Using the knob on the main unit
Turn INPUT SELECTOR .
• Turning INPUT SELECTOR switches the input source, as shown below.
AUX1
CDR
NET/USB
CD TV e q Input Source
The name of the highlighted input source is displayed.
w Recently used sources
The recently used input sources (up to fi ve) are displayed.
e Icons for the input sources in the different categories are displayed.
w Use uio p to select the input source, then press ENTER .
The input source is set and the source selection menu is turned off.
BD
M-XPort
DVD VCR
HD Radio
SAT
SIRIUS
GAME
PHONO
AUX1
CDR
NET/USB
CD TV
You can also use the following operation to select an input source.
25
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 25 2010/08/23 18:32:34
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS
Important information
Adjusting the master volume
Use VOLUME to adjust the volume. n When the “Volume Display” setting
(vpage 84) is “Relative”
G Adjustable rangeH
– – – –80.5dB – 18.0dB n When the “Volume Display” setting (vpage 84) is
“Absolute”
G Adjustable rangeH 0.0 – 99.0
• The adjustable range may vary depending on input signal and channel level settings.
ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS
Set the front speakers to be used
Press SPKR A/B .
• Each time you press SPKR A/B , the front speaker setting will change as follows.
Front A Front B Front A+B
You can also operate via the main unit.
In this case, perform the following operations.
Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume.
SVENSKA
Playing a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player
The following describes the procedure for playing Blu-ray Disc player/
DVD player.
1 Prepare for playback.
q Turn on the power of the TV, subwoofer and player.
w Change the TV input to the input of this unit.
e Load the disc in the player.
2 Press unit.
ON to turn on power to the
3 Press BD or DVD twice to switch the input source for the player used for playback.
4 Play the component connected to this unit.
Make the necessary settings on the player (language setting, subtitles setting, etc.) beforehand.
Turning off the sound temporarily
Press MUTE .
• The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” (vpage 84).
• To cancel, press MUTE again. Muting can also be canceled by adjusting the master volume.
Playing a CD player
The following describes the procedure for playing CD player.
1 Prepare for playback.
q Turn on the power of the subwoofer and player.
w Load the disc in the player.
2 Press unit.
ON to turn on power to the
3 Press CD twice to switch the input source to the CD player.
4 Play the component connected to this unit.
26
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 26 2010/08/23 18:32:35
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Playing an iPod®
You can play back both video, photo and audio.
1 Connect the iPod® to the USB
port (vpage 20 “Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port”).
2 Press unit.
ON to turn on power to the
3 Press NET/USB twice to switch the input source to “NET/USB”.
Favorite
Internet Radio
Media Server iPod
Flickr
Napster
Pandora
[1/8]
4 Use ui to select “iPod”, then press ENTER or p .
iPod
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Podcasts
Genres
Composers
[1/8]
SEARCH
Search
NOTE
If the connections screen is not displayed, the iPod may not be properly connected. Reconnect it.
5 Press SEARCH/INFO and hold it down for 2 seconds or more to select the display mode.
• There are two modes for displaying the contents recorded on the iPod.
Remote mode Display iPod information on the TV screen.
• The unit display shows single-byte alphanumeric characters and some symbols only. “.” is displayed in place of incompatible characters.
• In ”Remote mode”, the iPod display is as shown at right.
OK to disconnect.
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage 85). Press uio p to return to the original screen.
• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble reproduction, we recommend playback in M-DAX mode (vpage 76).
The default setting is “OFF”.
• In Remote mode, press STATUS during playback to check the title name, artist name, and album name.
NOTE
• Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some functions may not operate.
• Note that Marantz will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising with the data on an iPod when using this unit in conjunction with the iPod.
Direct mode Display iPod information on the iPod screen.
• “Direct iPod” is displayed on the display of this unit.
Display mode
Playable fi les
Active buttons
Music fi le
Video fi le
Remote control unit
(This unit) iPod®
Remote mode
P
P
Direct mode
P z
P
P z Only the sound is played.
6 Use ui to select the item, then press to select the fi le to be played.
ENTER or p
7 Press ENTER
Playback starts.
, p or 1 .
27
2010/08/23 18:32:36 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 27
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO
Playing an iPod® n
iPod operation
Operation buttons uio p
Function
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui) /
Manual search (Press and hold, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release)
ENTER
(Press and hold)
SEARCH
(Press and release)
SEARCH
(Press and hold)
RETURN
6 7
(Press and hold)
1
8 9
3
2
REPEAT
RANDOM
TV POWER
TV INPUT
Enter / Pause
Stop
Page search z 1 / Character search z 2
Remote / Direct mode switching
Return
Manual search
(fast-reverse/fast-forward)
Playback / Pause
Auto search (cue)
Pause
Stop
Repeat playback
Random playback
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz) z 1 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO , then press o (previous page) or p (next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO twice.
z 2 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO twice, then press o p to select the first letter you want to search mode.
• If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted list.” is displayed.
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO .
ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Playing a USB memory device
Playing back music or still picture (JPEG) files recorded on a USB memory device.
Important information
n
USB memory devices
A USB memory device can be connected to the USB port of this unit to play music and still picture (JPEG) files stored on the USB memory device.
Also, files stored on an iPod can be played when the iPod is connected directly to the USB port of this unit. See “Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port” (vpage 20).
• Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and
MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be played on this unit.
• This unit is compatible with USB memory devices in “FAT16” or
“FAT32” format.
Album art function
When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while playing the file.
Slide show function
Still picture (JPEG) files stored on USB memory devices can be played as slide shows.
The duration each picture is displayed can be set.
This unit plays back image (JPEG) files in the orientation in which they are stored in the folder.
G Compatible formatsH
USB memory devices z 1
WMA (Windows Media Audio) P z 2
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3)
WAV
P
P
P z 3 MPEG-4 AAC
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
JPEG
P
P z 1 USB
• This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
• This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using
MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
• This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
• WAV format Quantization bit rate: 16 bits.
• FLAC format Quantization bit rate: 16/24 bits.
z 2 Copyright-protected files can be played on certain portable players compatible with MTP.
z 3 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings.
G Compatible formatsH
Sampling frequency
Bit rate Extension
WMA (Windows
Media Audio)
MP3 (MPEG-1
Audio Layer-3)
WAV
32/44.1/48 kHz
32/44.1/48 kHz
32/44.1/48 kHz
48 – 192 kbps
32 – 320 kbps
–
.wma
.mp3
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320 kbps
.wav
.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4
FLAC (Free
Lossless Audio
Codec)
32/44.1/48/
88.2/96 kHz
– .flac
• Repeat playback and shuffle playback can also be set from “Input Setup” – “Playback Mode”
(vpage 71) in the menu.
• If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may not be able to perform a character search.
28
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 28 2010/08/23 18:32:36
Playing fi les stored on USB memory devices
1
2
Connect the USB memory device
to the USB port (vpage 20
“Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port”).
Press NET/USB favorite
Internet Radio
Media Server
USB
Flickr
Napster
Pandora
D&M1
D&M2
D&M3
Music1.mp4
Music2.mp3
Music3.m4a
Music4.m4a
twice to switch the input source to “NET/USB”.
[1/8]
3 Press ui to select “USB”, then press ENTER or p .
USB [1/7]
• Selecting in the “Source Select” menu, lets you directly select
“USB”.
4 Press ui to select the search item or folder, then press ENTER or p .
5 Press ui to select the fi le, then press
1 .
Playback starts.
ENTER , p or
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage 85). Press uio p to return to the original screen.
• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble reproduction, we recommend playback in M-DAX mode (vpage 76).
The default setting is “OFF”.
• If the USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions, only the top partition can be selected.
• This unit is compatible with MP3 fi les conforming to “MPEG-1 Audio
Layer-3” standards.
NOTE
• Note that Marantz will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising with the data on a USB memory device when using this unit in conjunction with the USB memory device.
• USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
• Marantz does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or be supplied power. When using a USB portable hard disk that can draw power from an AC adapter, we recommend using the
AC adapter.
• It is not possible to connect and use a computer via the USB port of this unit using a USB cable.
FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Playing a USB memory device n
USB operation
Operation buttons
PRESET +, – uio p
Function
Preset channel selection
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release)
ENTER
(Press and hold)
SEARCH
RETURN
1
8 9
3
2
1 – 8
SHIFT
REPEAT
RANDOM
TV POWER
TV INPUT
Enter / Pause
Stop
Page search z 1 / Character search z 2
Return
Playback / Pause
Auto search (cue)
Pause
Stop
Preset channel selection
Preset channel block selection
Repeat playback
Random playback
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz) z 1 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO , then press o (previous page) or p (next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO twice.
z 2 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO twice, then press o p to select the fi rst letter you want to search mode.
• If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted list.” is displayed.
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO .
• Repeat playback and shuffl e playback can also be set from “Input Setup” – “Playback Mode”
(vpage 71) in the menu.
• If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may not be able to perform a character search.
29
2010/08/23 18:32:36 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 29
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO
Tuning in radio stations
Important information
n
About SIRIUS XM radio
To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect either a SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio tuner (sold separately) to your satellite-ready receiver. Satellite Radio is available to residents of the US (except
Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.
Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-free music from categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country, R&B, Dance, Jazz,
Classical and many more plus coverage of all the top professional and college sports including play by play games from select leagues and teams. Additional programming includes expert sports talk, uncensored entertainment, comedy, family programming, local traffic and weather and news from your most trusted sources.
Whether you purchase a SIRIUS or XM tuner, you’ll need to activate and subscribe to begin enjoying the service. Easy to follow installation and setup instructions are provided with the satellite tuners. Whichever service you choose, there are a variety of programming packages available, including the option of adding
“The Best of SIRIUS” programming to your XM tuner or “The Best of XM” programming to your SIRIUS tuner, enabling you to enjoy the most popular programming among both services. The “Best of” packages are not available to SIRIUS or XM Canada subscribers at this time.
Family friendly packages are also available to restrict channels featuring content that may be inappropriate for children.
To subscribe to XM, U.S. customers should visit xmradio.com or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346); Canadian customers should visit xmradio.ca or call XM Listener Care at 1-877-GETXMSR
(1-877-438- 9677).
To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. and Canadian customers can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) or visit sirius.com (US) or siriuscanada.ca (Canada).
ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA n
SIRIUS XM radio legal
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. SIRIUS and
XM subscriptions sold separately. Taxes and a one-time activation fee may apply. XM tuners and home docks or SIRIUS tuners (each sold separately) are required to receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite radio service. All programming and fees subject to change. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or
XM Satellite Radio Systems. Service not available in Alaska and
Hawaii.
n
Using the HD Radio™ receiver
HD Radio stations offer higher sound quality than conventional
FM/ AM broadcasts. It is also possible to receive data services and select broadcasts from among up to eight multicast programs.
HD Radio Technology provides higher quality sound than conventional broadcasts and allows reception of data services.
• FM sounds as sensational as CDs
• AM sounds as rich as analog FM stereo
• A variety of “data services”, including text-based information, song title, artist name, album name, genre, etc. can be received.
Furthermore, in addition to conventional broadcasts, with
HD Radio broadcasting it is possible to choose from up to 8 multicast programs.
For detailed information on HD Radio Technology, please go to
“www. hdradio.com”.
Listening to SIRIUS satellite radio
1 Press SATR twice to switch the input source to “SIRIUS”.
2 Use TUNING + or TUNING – to select the channel.
When the channel is tuned in, the name of the song and artist are displayed.
• The channel switches continuously when TUNING + or TUNING – is pressed and held.
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “TUNER” (vpage 85). Press uio p to return to the original screen.
• The song title, artist name, composer name, category and reception level can be checked by pressing STATUS .
30
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 30 2010/08/23 18:32:37
n
Checking the SIRIUS signal strength and radio
ID
1 Press STATUS until
“SIGNAL” appears on the display.
The display will switch as shown below, depending on the reception conditions.
Display Status
EXCELLENT Signal strength is excellent
GOOD
WEAK
NO SIGNAL
Signal strength is good
Signal strength is weak
No signal
2 Adjust the position of the antenna until “SIGNAL:
EXCELLENT” is shown on the display.
3 Press STATUS is displayed.
until the channel (example: “SR001”)
4 Press TUNING + or TUNING – and select channel 0 (SR000).
Channel No. and Sirius ID are alternately shown on the display.
SR000 SiriusID
************
Sirius ID
• Write your own SIRIUS ID for storage use.
Sirius ID :
The strength of both the SIRIUS satellite and terrestrial signals can be checked “Antenna Aiming” (vpage 68).
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Tuning in radio stations n
Presetting radio channels (Preset memory)
Your favorite broadcast channels can be preset so that you can tune them in easily. Up to 56 channels can be preset.
1 Tune in the broadcast channel you want to preset.
2 Press MEMORY .
3 Press SHIFT to select the block
(A to G) in which to preset the channel (1 to 8 per block), then press PRESET + , PRESET – or
8 to select the preset number.
1 –
4 Press MEMORY the setting.
again to complete
• To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to
4.
You can also operate via the main unit. In this case, perform the following operations.
Press o p to select the preset radio channel.
n
Searching categories
1 Press o p .
SR001 Hits 1
CAT : Pops
Channel category
2 Use o p to select the category, to use the desired channel.
ui to select
NOTE
Preset channels are erased by overwriting them.
n
Listening to preset channels
Press PRESET + , PRESET – to select the desired preset channel, then press
ENTER .
• Preset channels can also be selected by pressing SHIFT/TOP MENU
8 (Channel).
(Block) and 1 – n
Accessing SIRIUS satellite radio channels directly
1 Press SEARCH/INFO .
2 Press 0 – 9 to input the channel.
Example: Accessing channel “SR123”:
Press 1 , 2 and 3 .
• If no button is pressed within several seconds, the channel automatically switches to the one whose number has been input.
3 Press ENTER to set that channel.
Reception switches to the selected channel.
• “UPDATING” is displayed while the encording code is being updated.
• “SIRIUS UPDATING” is displayed when updating SIRIUS tuner firmware.
• Refer to “Troubleshooting” – “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (vpage 113) regarding other messages.
31
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 31 2010/08/23 18:32:37
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA n
Tuning in radio stations
1
3
Parental Lock
Tune to the channel you want to lock.
2 Press ENTER for at least 3 seconds.
“Enter Lock Code” is displayed.
Enter the 4-digit lock code using uio p or 0 – 9 .
When you enter the correct code, the corresponding channel is locked.
4 Press ENTER .
• Channels under Parental Lock cannot be tuned in by performing channel up/down or by category search.
• Channels stored in preset memory can be tuned in by the preset channel select operation, even if Parental Lock is applied.
• When a channel to which Parental Lock is applied is being played,
Parental Lock for that channel is cancelled by performing step 2.
• See “Edit Lock Cord” (vpage 68) for the method of changing
Parental Lock Cord.
• You can also set “Parental Lock” (vpage 67) from the menu.
n
SIRIUS operation
Operation buttons
PRESET +, – uio p
ENTER
(Press and hold)
SEARCH
RETURN
TUNING +, –
0 – 9
SHIFT
MEMORY
TV POWER
TV INPUT
Function
Preset channel selection
Cursor operation / Category search
To parental lock password check screen
Direct search
Return
Channel selection
Preset channel selection (1 – 8) /
Direct frequency tuning (0 – 9)
Preset channel block selection
Preset memory registration
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
Listening to HD Radio stations
1
2
Press TUNE twice to switch the input source to “HD Radio”.
Press
“AM”.
BAND to select “FM” or
FM When listening to an FM broadcast.
AM When listening to an AM broadcast.
3 Tune in the desired broadcast station.
q To tune in automatically (Auto tuning)
Press T.MODE
to light the “HD-AUTO” or “AUTO” indicator on the display, then use TUNING + or TUNING – to select the station you want to hear.
• The indicator lights on the display when an HD Radio station is tuned in.
• When “HD-AUTO” (tuning mode) is selected, only HD Radio stations are tuned in.
• If “AUTO” (tuning mode) is selected, both HD Radio and analog stations are tuned in.
w To tune in manually (Manual tuning)
Press use
T.MODE
to turn off the display’s “AUTO” indicator, then
TUNING + or TUNING – to select the station you want to hear.
• If the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning, tune it in manually.
• When tuning in stations manually, press and hold
TUNING – to change frequencies continuously.
TUNING + or
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “TUNER” (vpage 85). Press uio p to return to the original screen.
32
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 32 2010/08/23 18:32:38
n
Selecting audio programs
HD Radio Technology enables stations to broadcast multiple Audio
Program and data services on HD2 / HD3 / HD4 channels.
Press ui program.
to select the audio
If the station you are listening to has multiple audio programs, “HD1” is indicated on the display. If it only has one audio program,
“HD” is indicated.
n
Presetting radio stations (Manual preset)
Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them in easily. Up to 56 stations can be preset.
• Stations can be preset automatically at “Auto Preset” (vpage 67).
If “Auto Preset” is performed after performing “Manual Preset”, the
“Manual Preset” settings will be overwritten.
1 Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset.
2 Press MEMORY .
3 Press SHIFT/TOP MENU to select the block (A to G) in which to preset the channel (1 to 8 per block), then press preset number.
PRESET + ,
PRESET – or 1 – 8 to select the
4 Press MEMORY the setting.
again to complete
• To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to
4.
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL
Default settings
Block (A – G) and
Channel (1 – 8)
A1 – A8
B1 – B8
C1 – C8
D1 – D8
E1 – E8
F1 – F8
G1 – G8
Default Settings
87.5 / 87.9 / 89.1 / 93.3 / 97.9 / 98.1 / 98.9 /
100.1 MHz
101.9 / 102.7 / 107.9 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 /
90.1 / 90.1 MHz
530 / 600 / 930 / 1000 / 1120 / 1210 / 1400 /
1710 kHz
90.1 MHz
90.1 MHz
90.1 MHz
90.1 MHz
ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Tuning in radio stations n
Direct frequency tuning
You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in.
1 Press SEARCH/INFO .
2 Input frequencies using the 0 – 9.
• If o is pressed, the immediately preceding input is cancelled.
3 When setting is completed, press
ENTER .
The preset frequency is tuned in.
Specify a name for the preset broadcast station
(Preset Name) (vpage 68)
Listening to preset stations
1 Press SHIFT/TOP MENU to select the memory block (A to G).
2 Press PRESET + , PRESET – or
1 – 8 to select the desired preset channel.
You can also operate via the main unit. In this case, perform the following operations.
Press o p to select the preset radio station.
n
Check the HD Radio reception information
Press STATUS while an HD Radio broadcast is being received.
The current reception information is shown on the display.
q Normal w Frequency / Signal strength e Station name / Program and Program type r Title name / Artist name t Album name / Genre name
NOTE
If the station signal weakens while receiving a digital broadcast (while
and text is displayed), the mode automatically switches to the analog reception mode (the reception frequency is displayed).
Because of this, the indicator and text may flicker if the station signal level is weak and unstable.
33
2010/08/23 18:32:38 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 33
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS
Tuning in radio stations n
Tuner (HD Radio reception) operation
Operation buttons
PRESET +, – uio p
ENTER
SEARCH
RETURN
BAND
T.MODE
TUNING +, –
0 – 9
SHIFT
MEMORY
TV POWER
TV INPUT
Function
Preset channel selection
Cursor operation /
Multicast switching (ui)
Enter
Direct frequency tuning
Return
FM/AM switching
Switch search modes
Tuning (up/down)
Preset channel selection (1 – 8) /
Direct frequency tuning (0 – 9)
Preset channel block selection
Preset memory registration
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Playing a network audio
Follow this procedure to play Internet radio stations or music or still picture (JPEG) files stored on a computer .
Important information
n
About the internet radio function
• Internet radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the
Internet.
Internet radio stations from around the world can be received.
• This unit is equipped with the following Internet radio functions:
• Stations can be selected by genre and region.
• Up to 56 Internet radio stations can be preset.
• Internet radio stations in MP3 and WMA (Windows Media
Audio) format can be listened to.
• Your favorite radio stations can be registered by accessing an exclusive Marantz Internet radio URL from a Web browser on a computer.
• The function is managed for individual users, so you must provide your MAC or e-mail address.
Exclusive URL: http://www.radiomarantz.com
• The radio station database service may be suspended without notice.
• This unit’s Internet radio station list is created using a radio station database service (vTuner). This database service provides a list edited and created for this unit.
n
Media player
This function lets you play music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) stored on a computer (media server) connected to this unit via a network.
With this unit’s network audio playback function, connection to the server is possible using one of the technologies below.
• Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service
• Windows Media DRM10
Album art function
When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while the music files are playing.
Slide show function
Still picture (JPEG) files stored in folders on a media server can be played as slide shows. The duration each picture is displayed can be set.
This unit plays back image (JPEG) files in the orientation in which they are stored in the folder.
G Compatible formatsH
Internet radio Media server z 1
WMA (Windows
Media Audio)
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio
Layer-3)
WAV
MPEG-4 AAC
FLAC (Free Lossless
Audio Codec)
JPEG
P
P
P
P
P
P
P z 2
P
A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network.
z 1 Media server
• This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
• This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using
MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
• This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
• WAV format Quantization bit rate: 16 bits.
• FLAC format Quantization bit rate: 16/24 bits.
z 2 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings.
For music files in WMA (Windows Media Audio) format, the album art is only played when using Windows Media Player ver. 11.
34
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 34 2010/08/23 18:32:39
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Playing a network audio
WMA (Windows
Media Audio)
MP3 (MPEG-1
Audio Layer-3)
WAV
MPEG-4 AAC
FLAC (Free
Lossless Audio
Codec)
G Compatible formatsH
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
32/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192 kbps
32/44.1/48 kHz 32 – 320 kbps
32/44.1/48 kHz –
32/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320 kbps
32/44.1/48/
88.2/96 kHz
–
Extension
.wma
.mp3
.wav
.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4
.fl ac n
About Flickr
Flickr is an online photograph sharing service that started in 2004.
You can use the this unit to view photographs that have been made public by Flickr users. You do not need an account to use Flickr.
To view photographs that you recorded yourself, you need an account in order to upload these photographs to the Flickr server.
For details, see the Flickr homepage.
http://www.fl ickr.com/
Listening to internet radio
1 Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the
“Network Connecting” (vpage 81).
2 Press NET/USB twice to switch the input source to “NET/USB”.
3 Press ui to select “Internet
Radio”, then press ENTER or p .
• Selecting in the “Source Select” menu, lets you directly select
“Internet Radio”.
4 Press press ui to select the item you want to play, then
ENTER or p .
5 Repeat step 4 until the station list is displayed.
The station list is displayed.
6 Press ui to select the station, then press p .
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
ENTER or n
About Napster
Napster is a monthly subscription music distribution service provided by Napster LLC. This service allows users to download and play pieces of music they want to hear on this unit. Before you can use Napster, you will need to visit the Napster website on your PC to create an account and register as a member. For details, access the following site: http://www.napster.com/choose/index_default.html
n
About Pandora
Pandora is an automated music recommendation and Internet radio service created by the Music Genome Project.
When you fi rst listen to Pandora, it is necessary to subscribe to a
Pandora account at the Pandora homepage by your PC and register this machine. See the Pandora homepage for details.
http://www.pandora.com/marantz n
About Rhapsody
Rhapsody is a paid music broadcast service of RealNetworks.
When you fi rst listen to Rhapsody, it is necessary to subscribe to a Rhapsody account at the Rhapsody homepage by your PC and register this machine. See the Rhapsody homepage for details.
http://www.rhapsody.com/marantz
• There are many Internet radio stations on the Internet, and the quality of the programs they broadcast as well as the bit rate of the tracks varies widely.
Generally, the higher the bit rate, the higher the sound quality, but depending on the communication lines and server traffi c, the music or audio signals being streamed may be interrupted. Inversely, lower bit rates mean a lower sound quality but less tendency for the sound to be interrupted.
• “Server Full” or “Connection Down” is displayed if the station is busy or not broadcasting.
• On this unit, folder and fi le names can be displayed as titles. Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “.” (period).
• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble reproduction, we recommend playback in M-DAX mode (vpage 76).
The default setting is “OFF”.
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vvpage 85. Press uio p to return to the original screen.
• When STATUS is pressed, the display can be switched between the title name and radio station name.
n
Recently played internet radio stations
Recently played internet radio stations can be selected from
“Recently Played”.
Up to 20 stations stored in “Recently Played”.
1 Press ui to select “Recently
Played”, then press ENTER or p .
2 Press ui to select the item you want to play, then press ENTER or p .
n
Searching stations by keyword
(Alphabetic strings)
1 Press ui to select “Search by Keyword”, then press
ENTER or p .
Search by Keyword
Enter Station
SEARCH
Input
Keyboard
INSERT
Submit
Insert
RETURN
DELETE
Cancel
Delete
• For character input, see page 65.
2 Input the characters, then press ENTER .
35
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 35 2010/08/23 18:32:39
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS
Playing a network audio n
Presetting internet radio stations
Preset Internet radio stations can be selected directly.
1 While the Internet radio station you want to preset is playing, press MEMORY .
2 Press ui to select “Preset”, then press ENTER .
3 Press SHIFT/TOP MENU , then press PRESET + , PRESET – or
1 – 8 to select the desired preset number.
4 Press MEMORY again to complete the setting.
The Internet radio station is now preset.
ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS
1 Press MEMORY while the Internet radio station you want to register is playing.
2 Press ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER .
3 Press o to select “Add”.
The Internet radio station is registered.
• If you do not want to register the station, press p .
SVENSKA n
Registering internet radio stations as your favorites
Favorites are listed at the top of the menu screen, so when a station is registered as a favorite it can be tuned in easily.
NOTE
If registered at a number that has already been preset, the previously registered setting is cleared.
n
Listening to preset internet radio stations
After pressing SHIFT/TOP MENU , press
PRESET + , PRESET – or 1 – 8 to select the registered preset number.
This unit automatically connects to the
Internet and playback begins.
n
Listening to internet radio stations registered in your favorites
1 Press AMP and then press
SOURCE SEL to display the
Source Select menu, then select
(vpage 25).
2 Press NET/USB and then press ui to select the Internet radio station, then press ENTER or p .
This unit automatically connects to the
Internet and playback begins.
3 Press o to select “Remove”.
The selected Internet radio station is cleared.
• To cancel the operation without clearing the station, press p .
n
Internet radio operation
Operation buttons
PRESET +, – uio p
ENTER
(Press and release)
ENTER
(Press and hold)
SEARCH
RETURN
2
1 – 8
SHIFT
MEMORY
TV POWER
TV INPUT
Function
Preset channel selection
Cursor operation
Enter
Stop
Page search z 1 / Character search z 2
Return
Stop
Preset channel selection
Preset channel block selection
Favorites / Preset memory registration
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz) z 1 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO , then press o (previous page) or p (next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO twice.
z 2 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO twice, then press o p to select the fi rst letter you want to search mode.
• If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted list.” is displayed.
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO .
n
Clearing internet radio stations from your favorites
1 Press AMP and then press
SOURCE SEL to display the
Source Select menu, then select
(vpage 25).
2 Press NET/USB and then press ui to select the Internet radio station you want to clear, then press MEMORY .
If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may not be able to perform a character search.
36
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 36 2010/08/23 18:32:40
Playing files stored on a computer
Use this procedure to play music files, image files or playlists.
1 Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the
“Network Connecting” (vpage 81).
e Prepare the computer
(vComputer’s operating instructions).
2 Press AMP and then press
SOURCE SEL to display the
Source Select menu, then select
(vpage 25).
3 Press NET/USB and then use ui to select the server including the file to be played, then press p .
ENTER or
4 Use ui to select the search item or folder, then press ENTER or p .
5 Repeat step 4 until the file is displayed.
6 Press ui to select the file, then press ENTER
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
or p .
SVENSKA
• Connections to the required system and specific settings must be made in order to play music files (vpage 24).
• Before starting, you must launch the computer’s server software and set the files as server contents. For details, see the operating instructions of your server software.
• Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may be required for the file to be displayed.
• The order in which the tracks/files are displayed depends on the server specifications. If the tracks/ files are not displayed in alphabetical order due to the server specifications, searching by the first letter may not work properly.
• WMA Lossless files can be played when using a server supporting transcoding, such as Windows Media Player Ver. 11.
NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO
• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble reproduction, we recommend playback in M-DAX mode (vpage 76).
The default setting is “OFF”.
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage 85). Press uio p to return to the original screen.
• Use STATUS to switch between displaying the title name, artist name or album name.
n
Playing files that have been preset or registered in your favorites
Files can be preset, registered in your favorites and played using the same operations as for Internet radio stations (vpage 36).
NOTE
• Presettings are erased by overwriting them.
• When the operations described below is performed, the media server’s database is updated and it may no longer be possible to play preset or favorite music files.
• When you quit the media server and then restart it.
• When music files are deleted or added on the media server.
• When using an ESCIENT server, place “ESCIENT” before the server name.
FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Playing a network audio n
Media server operation
Operation buttons
PRESET +, – uio p
Function
Preset channel selection
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release)
ENTER
(Press and hold)
SEARCH
RETURN
1
8 9
3
2
1 – 8
SHIFT
Enter / Pause
Stop
Page search z 1 / Character search z 2
Return
Playback / Pause
Auto search (cue)
Pause
Stop
Preset channel selection
Preset channel block selection
MEMORY
TV POWER
TV INPUT
Favorites / Preset memory registration
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
• Repeat playback (vpage 71 “Repeat”)
• Random playback (vpage 71 “Random”) z 1 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO , then press o (previous page) or p (next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO twice.
z 2 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO twice, then press o p to select the first letter you want to search mode.
• If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted list.” is displayed.
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO .
If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may not be able to perform a character search.
37
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 37 2010/08/23 18:32:40
ENGLISH DEUTSCH n
Viewing photographs shared by particular users
1
2
Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the
“Network Connecting” (vpage 81).
Press AMP and then press
SOURCE SEL to display the
Source Select menu, then select
(vpage 25).
FRANÇAIS ITALIANO
Playing a network audio
Viewing photographs on the Flickr site
You can view photographs shared by particular users, or all of the photographs shared on Flickr.
6 Press or p .
ui
ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS
to select the folder, and then press
SVENSKA
Favorites Displays the favorite photographs of the specifi ed user.
Photostream Displays a list of shared photographs.
ENTER
PhotoSets Displays the folder (photograph album) list.
Contacts Displays a Username registered for Flickr Contact by a particular user.
Remove this
Contact
Deletes a user from Flickr Contact.
7 Press ui to select the fi le, and then press or p .
The selected fi le is displayed.
ENTER
3
4
Flickr
Press
Add Flickr Contact
All Content
NET/USB
[1/2]
and then use
Flickr Contact”, then press ENTER or p .
Enter “Username”.
• For character input, see page 65.
ui to select “Add
5 After inputting the “Username”, then press
The “Username” entered in step 4 is displayed.
ENTER .
• If the Username you typed in cannot be found, “The Flickr Contact you entered could not be found” appears. Check and type in the correct Username.
n
Viewing all photographs on Flickr
1 Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the
“Network Connecting” (vpage 81).
2 Press AMP and then press
SOURCE SEL to display the
Source Select menu, then select
(vpage 25).
Flickr
Add Flickr Contact
All Content
[1/2]
3 Press NET/USB and then use ui
Content”, then press ENTER or p .
to select “All
4 Press or p .
ui to select the folder, and then press ENTER
Interestingness Displays photographs that are popular from the number of user comments or number of times they are added as favorites.
Recent Displays the most recently added photographs.
Search by text Search for photographs by keyword.
5 Press ui to select the fi le, and then press or p .
The selected fi le is displayed.
ENTER
NOTE
Depending on the fi le format, some photographs cannot be viewed. n
Flickr operation
Operation buttons
PRESET +, – uio p
Function
Preset channel selection
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release)
ENTER
(Press and hold)
SEARCH
RETURN
2
1 – 8
SHIFT
TV POWER
TV INPUT
Enter
Stop
Page Search z
Return
Stop
Preset channel selection
Preset channel block selection
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz) z When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO , then press o (previous page) or p
(next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO .
38
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 38 2010/08/23 18:32:41
Listening to Napster
1 Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the
“Network Connecting” (vpage 81).
2 Press AMP and then press
SOURCE SEL to display the
Source Select menu, then select
(vpage 25).
3 Press NET/USB and then use
“Username” and “Password”.
ui p to input
Napster Account
Username
Password
OK
Enter Username
RETURN
Cancel
• For character input, see page 65.
4 After inputting the “Username” and “Password”, select “OK”, then press ENTER .
If the “Username” and “Password” match, the top menu for
Napster is displayed.
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL n
Searching from Napster menu
1 Use ui to select search item or folder, then press ENTER or p .
2 Repeat step 1 until the track is displayed.
3 Use ui or p .
to select the track item, then press ENTER
ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Playing a network audio n
Registering tracks in my Napster library
1 Press p while the track you wish to register is playing.
2 Select “Add to my library”, then press ENTER or p .
The track is entered in the Library.
n
Entering a character search for the track you want to listen to
1 Press SEARCH/INFO .
Napster
My Napster Library
Top 100s
Search by Artist
New Releases
Radio Search by Albums
Napster Playlists
E
Search by Track
Staff Picks
• You can search by artist name, album name or track name.
2 Use ui to select the search item, then press
The search display appears.
ENTER .
Search by Artist
[1/8]
Listening to tracks registered in my Napster library
1 Use ui to select “My Napster
Library”, then press p .
ENTER or
2 Use ui to select the information or track, then press ENTER .
• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble reproduction, we recommend playback in M-DAX mode (vpage 76).
The default setting is “OFF”.
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage 85). Press uio p to return to the original screen.
• Use STATUS to switch between displaying the title name, artist name or album name.
Enter Artist Name NOTE
• The password should be no longer than 99 characters.
• Press RETURN to cancel the input. When “Cancel input?” is displayed, select “Yes”, then press ENTER .
SEARCH
Input
Keyboard
INSERT
Submit
Insert
RETURN
DELETE
Cancel
Delete
• For character input, see page 65.
3 Input the characters, then press ENTER .
39
2010/08/23 18:32:41 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 39
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO
Playing a network audio n
Napster operation
Operation buttons
PRESET +, – uio p
Function
Preset channel selection
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release)
ENTER
(Press and hold)
SEARCH
RETURN
1
8 9
2
1 – 8
SHIFT
Enter / Pause
Stop
Search menu / Page search z
Return
Playback / Pause
Auto search (cue)
Stop
Preset channel selection
Preset channel block selection
TV POWER
TV INPUT
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
• Repeat playback (vpage 71 “Repeat”)
• Random playback (vpage 71 “Random”) z When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH/INFO twice, then press o (previous page) or p (next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO .
Listening to Pandora
1
2
Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power (vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the “Network Connecting”
(vpage 81).
Press AMP
ESPAÑOL
and then press
NEDERLANDS
SOURCE SEL to display the
Source Select menu, then select
(vpage 25).
Then press NET/USB .
Pandora
I have a Pandora account
I am new to Pandora
Enter
RETURN
Cancel
Pandora
I have a Pandora account
I am new to Pandora
Please got to http://www.pandora.com/marantz and follow the instructions there to create a new account.
Your aactivation code is
4DA2C67B
Continue
RETURN
Cancel
SVENSKA
• If you do not have a Pandora account, press i to select “I am new to Pandora”. The URL of Pandora and activation code are displayed. Access the Pandora web page from your PC and register the displayed activation code and account information. Then press
ENTER .
3
4
If you have a Pandora account, press ui to select
“I have a Pandora account”, then press ENTER or p .
Pandora Account
Email address
Password
OK
Enter Email address
RETURN
Cancel
Input “Email address” and “Password”.
• For character input, see page 65.
5 After inputting the “Email address” and “Password”, select “OK”, then press ENTER .
If the “Email address” and “Password” match, the top menu for
Pandora is displayed.
NOTE
Press RETURN to cancel the input. When “Cancel input?” is displayed, select “Yes”, then press ENTER .
40
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 40 2010/08/23 18:32:42
n
Creating an original radio station
You can create up to 100 original radio stations.
1 Use ui to select “New Station”, then press ENTER or p .
My Station
Exit
New Station
Quick Mix
D&M1 Radio
RETURN
Sign out
2 Input a “Track Name” or “Artist Name”, then press
ENTER .
• For character input, see page 65.
3 Use ui to select “Search by artist” or “Search by track”, then press ENTER .
You can search and display a list by track or artist.
4 Press ui , select a fi le (e.g. D&M2) from the list, and press ENTER or p
Selected fi le is played back.
.
“Radio” is added to the end of a fi lename, and your original radio station is created (e.g. D&M2 Radio).
My Station
Exit
[1/3]
New Station
Quick Mix
D&M1 Radio
D&M2 Radio
[1/4]
RETURN
Sign out
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL n
Listening to a created radio station
Listening to a created radio station
(e.g. D&M2 Radio)
By specifying your favorite track or artist name, music that has a similar rhythm or sound is chosen and streamed.
Press ui and select the radio station
(“D&M2 Radio”) that you want to
listen to, and press ENTER or p .
In Pandora, you can search for the track name or artist name using “D&M2” as a keyword.
When the search is complete, tracks that have a similar rhythm or sound are streamed.
ITALIANO FRANÇAIS
Menu
I like this track i don’t like this track
Why is this track playing?
Create station
Bookmark this track
I’m tired of this track
Delete this station
DEUTSCH
[1/7]
ENGLISH
Playing a network audio n
Arranging tracks within radio stations
You can sort tracks by operating the Pandora menu screen while a track is playing.
Press p while a track is playing.
The Pandora menu screen is displayed.
D&M2 Radio
00:15
100%
Pause
Song
Artist
Album
Skip
Now Playing
MP3 128kbps
Select
Menu
Listening to created radio stations at random
Use ui press
to select “Quick Mix”, then
ENTER or p .
Created radio stations are selected at random, and tracks are streamed.
I like this track • Press when you like the track that is being played.
• It will return to the Play Screen. And (Thumbs up) icon is displayed. (The icon is not displayed on
I don’t like this track the next track.)
• Press when you don’t like the track that is being
Why is this track playing?
played.
• It will return to the Play Screen. And (Thumbs down) icon is displayed. (The icon is not displayed on the next track .)
• Displays the reason why Pandora selected this track.
Create station
Bookmark this track
I’m tired of this track
Delete this station
• Creates a Station for the Track or Artist being played.
• Bookmarks the track currently being played.
• You can check on a computer or iPhone etc.
• For details, see the Pandora web page.
• Press when you don’t like the track that is being played.
• The track will not be played for 1 month.
• Press when you want to delete the station that is being played.
NOTE
• You can Skip up to 6 Tracks that are being played back within 1 hour.
• You can create up to 100 New Stations (radio stations).
41
2010/08/23 18:32:43 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 41
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS
Playing a network audio n
Sign out
Disassociate this unit from your Pandora account.
1 While the Pandora top menu is displayed, press RETURN .
My Station [1/4]
ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Exit
New Station
Quick Mix
D&M1 Radio
D&M2 Radio
RETURN
Sign out
2 When the popup menu appears, press
“Yes”.
o p to select
Listening to Rhapsody
1 Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power (vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the “Network Connecting”
(vpage 81).
2 Press AMP and then press SOURCE SEL to display the Source Select menu, then select (vpage 25).
Then press NET/USB .
3 Use ui to select “Sign in to your account”, then press or p .
ENTER
Rhapsody n
Pandora operation
Operation buttons uio p
Function
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, i)
ENTER
(Press and release)
ENTER
(Press and hold)
SEARCH
RETURN
1
9
3
2
TV POWER
TV INPUT
Enter / Pause
Stop
Page search z
Return
Playback
Auto search (cue)
Pause
Stop
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz) z When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH , then press o (previous page) or p (next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH .
4 Input Username and Password.
Rhapsody Account Sign In
Username
Password
OK
Start a 30-day trial
Sign in to your account
Enter
RETURN
Cancel
RETURN
Cancel
Enter Username
• For character input, see page 65.
5 After inputting the “Username” and “Password”, select “OK”, then press ENTER .
If the “Username” and “Password” match, the top menu for
Rhapsody is displayed.
NOTE
• The password should be no longer than 99 characters.
• Press RETURN to cancel the input. When “Cancel input?” is displayed, select “Yes”, then press ENTER .
n
Select the search mode
Rhapsody [1/4]
Rhapsody Music Guide
Search
Rhapsody Channels
My Library e r w q q
Search from Rhapsody latest information
1 Use ui to select “Rhapsody
Music Guide”, then press or p .
ENTER
2 Press ui to select the information for track selection, then press ENTER or p .
• For character input, see page 65.
3 Repeat step 2 until the track is displayed.
4 Use ui to select the track, then press ENTER or p .
w
Enter a character search for the track you want to listen to
1 Use ui press
to select “Search”, then
ENTER or p .
2 Use ui to select the search item, then press ENTER or p
The search display appears.
.
• You can search by artist name, album name, track name or keyword.
3 Enter the characters, then press ENTER .
42
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 42 2010/08/23 18:32:43
e
Search from the Rhapsody internet radio station
1 Use ui to select “Rhapsody
Channels”, then press ENTER or p .
2 Repeat step 1 until the radio station is displayed.
3 Use ui to select radio station, then press or p .
The search display appears.
ENTER r
Listening to tracks registered in my library
1 Use ui to select “My Library”, then press ENTER or p .
2 Repeat step 1 until the track is displayed.
3 Use ui to select the information or track, then press ENTER or p .
After selecting, the information is displayed n
Track menu
Press p during playback to display the track menu.
Introduction [1/6]
Jamp to artist
Jamp to album
Similar artists
Similar albums
Add to my library
Rating e q w
SVENSKA q w e
NEDERLANDS
Rating function
ESPAÑOL
Search from the similar music
Use ui then press
to select the search item,
ENTER or p .
Registering tracks in my library
Use ui to select “Add to my library”, then press ENTER
The track is entered in the library.
or p .
1 Use ui press
to select “Rating”, then
ENTER or p .
2 Use o press p to select the rating, then
ENTER .
ITALIANO
• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble reproduction, we recommend playback in M-DAX mode (vpage 76).
The default setting is “OFF”.
• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage 85). Press uio p to return to the original screen.
• Use STATUS to switch between displaying the title name, artist name or album name.
FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Playing a network audio n
Rhapsody operation
Operation buttons
PRESET +, – uio p
Function
Preset channel selection
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter / Pause
ENTER
(Press and hold)
SEARCH
RETURN
1
8 9
3
Stop
Page search z 1 / Character search z 2
Return
Playback / Pause
Auto search (cue)
Pause
Stop
Preset channel selection
2
1 – 8
SHIFT Preset channel block selection
TV POWER
TV INPUT
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
• Repeat playback (vpage 71 “Repeat”)
• Random playback (vpage 71 “Random”) z 1 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH , then press o (previous page) or p
(next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH twice.
z 2 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH twice, then press o p to select the fi rst letter you want to search mode.
• If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted list.” is displayed.
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH .
If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may not be able to perform a character search.
43
2010/08/23 18:32:45 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 43
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode)
This unit can play input audio signals in multi-channel surround mode or in stereo mode.
Select a listening mode suitable for the playback contents (cinema, music, etc.) or according to your liking.
Listening mode
Input audio signal
Playback Listening mode
2-channel
Multi channel
Surround
Multi-channel
playback (vpage 44)
For 2-channel signal input:
• Surround-channel signals are created and played with surround playback.
For multichannel signal input:
• The surround signal recorded in source is played as surround playback.
(The sound is played according to the settings of the speaker size in
“Speaker Config.” (vpage 78).)
• Surround-back-channel or front-height-channel signals that are not recorded in source can be created.
2-channel
Multi channel
Stereo
Stereo playback
(vpage 46)
• If multichannel signals are input, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio and are played.
• Subwoofer signals are also output.
2-channel
Multi channel
Stereo
Surround
Direct playback
(vpage 46)
Sound recorded in source is played as is.
• Surround back signals or front height signals are not created.
• In this mode, the following items cannot be adjusted.
• Tone (vpage 73)
• Dynamic EQ® (vpage 74)
• M-DAX (vpage 76)
• MultEQ® XT (vpage 74)
• Dynamic Volume® (vpage 75)
2-channel
Multi channel
Virtual
Surround
Dolby Virtual Speaker/
Dolby Headphone
playback (vpage 46)
Virtual Surround processing is performed on 2-channel or multichannel input signals that are played back.
• Some listening modes cannot be selected, depending on the audio format or number of channels of the input signal.
For details, see “Types of input signals, and corresponding surround modes” (vpage 106).
• Adjust the sound field effect with the menu “Surround Parameter” (vpage 73) to enjoy your favorite sound mode.
• You can select the listening mode by pressing SURROUND MODE on the main unit.
Press SURROUND MODE and the modes are switched as shown below.
AUTO*(STEREO)
DOLBY VS
STEREO
NEURAL
DOLBY PLgz DOLBY PLg(x) Movie
MULTI CH STEREO z For “AUTO”, press AUTO on the amplifier or remote control unit.
DOLBY PLg(x) Music
DTS NEO:6 music
DOLBY PLg(x) Game
DTS NEO:6 cinema
Multi-channel playback
n
Surround playback of 2-channel sources
1 Playing the source (vpage 26 –
42).
2
• If
Press SURR.
to select the surround decoder to play back multichannel sound.
SURROUND MODE on the main unit is pressed, the same function as with the remote control unit can be obtained.
• Each time SURR.
is pressed, the surround mode is switched.
Which decoder can be selected depends on the settings of “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) or “Speaker Config.” (vpage 78).
DOLBY PLgz z 1 This mode is for 7.1-channel surround playback using the front height speakers.
• “PLgz Height” is displayed.
DOLBY PLgx z 2 This mode is for 7.1-channel or 6.1-channel surround playback using the surround back speakers.
• “PLgx Movie”, “PLgx Music” or “PLgx Game” is displayed.
DOLBY PLg This mode is for 5.1-channel surround playback.
Select this mode if no front height speaker nor surround back speaker is to be used.
• “PLg Movie”, “PLg Music”, “PLg Game” is displayed.
DTS NEO:6
MULTI CH
STEREO
This mode is for 7.1-channel, 6.1-channel or
5.1-channel surround playback using the surround back speakers.
• “DTS NEO:6 Cinema” or “DTS NEO:6 Music” is displayed.
This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers.
44
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 44 2010/08/23 18:32:45
NEURAL z 3 This mode is for 7.1-channel, 6.1-channel or
5.1-channel surround playback using the surround back speakers.
• “NEURAL” is displayed.
z 1 This can be selected when the “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) setting in the menu is set to “Normal” is set to “A”.
z 2 This can be selected when “Amp Assign” is set to “Normal” or
“Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” is not set to “None”.
z 3 This mode supports analog 2-channel audio, and linear PCM 2 channel (44.1 kHz, 48 kHz) audio.
G Views on the displayH q w n
Surround playback of multi-channel sources
(Dolby Digital, DTS etc.)
1 Playing the source (vpage 26 –
42).
2 Press SURR.
to select the surround decoder to play back multichannel sound.
• If SURROUND MODE on the main unit is pressed, the same function as with the remote control unit can be obtained.
• Select the surround mode while viewing the display on the screen (v“Displaying the currently playing surround mode” at right).
• Which decoder can be selected depends on the input signal, the settings of “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) or “Speaker Config.”
(vpage 78).
SVENSKA q Shows a decoder to be used.
w Shows Audyssey
DSX™ processing.
NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO
Displaying the currently playing surround mode
Input signal
DOLBY DIGITAL
(2ch)
NEURAL
Surround mode
NEURAL
DOLBY DIGITAL
(other than 2ch) /
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
DOLBY TrueHD
DTS (5.1ch) /
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 /
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 /
DTS 96/24
DTS-HD
PCM (multi ch)
All Input signal
All signals indicated above
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx Movie
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx Music
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgz
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + EX
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgx
Movie
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgx
Music
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgz
DOLBY TrueHD
DOLBY TrueHD + EX
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgx Movie
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgx Music
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgz
DTS SURROUND
DTS + PLgx Movie
DTS + PLgx Music
DTS + PLgz HEIGHT
DTS + NEO:6
DTS ES MTRX6.1
z 1
DTS ES DSCRT6.1
z 2
DTS 96/24 z 3
DTS-HD HI RES
DTS-HD MSTR
DTS-HD + NEO:6
DTS-HD + PLgx MOVIE
DTS-HD + PLgx MUSIC
DTS-HD + PLgz HEIGHT
DTS Express
MULTI CH IN
MULTI IN + Dolby EX
MULTI IN + PLgx MOVIE
MULTI IN + PLgx MUSIC
MULTI IN + PLgz HEIGHT
MULTI CH IN 7.1
Dolby VIRTUAL SPEAKER
Audyssey DSX z 4
Display
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY D + PL x MV
DOLBY D + PL x MS
DOLBY D PL z
DOLBY DIGITAL +
DOLBY D + EX
DOLBY D + PL x MV
DOLBY D + PL x MS
DOLBY D + PL z
DOLBY TrueHD
DOLBY HD EX
DOLBY HD +PL x MV
DOLBY HD +PL x MS
DOLBY HD PL z
DTS SURROUND
DTS PL x MV
DTS PL x MS
DTS PL z
DTS NEO:6
DTS ES MTRX6.1
DTS ES DSCRT6.1
DTS 96/24
DTS-HD HI RES
DTS-HD MSTR
DTS-HD NEO:6
DTS-HD PL x MV
DTS-HD PL x MS
DTS-HD PL z
DTS Express
MULTI CH IN
MULTI Dolby EX
MULTI IN PL x MV
MULTI IN PL x MS
MULTI IN PL z
MULTI CH IN 7.1
DOLBY VS
Audyssey DSX
FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Multi-channel playback z 1 This is displayed when the input signal is
“DTS-ES Matrix 6.1”.
z 2 This is displayed when the input signal is
“DTS-ES Discrete 6.1”.
z 3 This is displayed when the input signal is
“DTS 96/24”.
z 4 This surround mode is displayed when
“Audyssey DSX” (vpage 75) is set to
“ON–Height–” or “ON-–Wide–”.
G Views on the displayH q w q Shows a decoder to be used.
• A DOLBY DIGITAL Plus decoder is displayed as “DOLBY D +”.
w Shows a decoder that creates sound output from the surround back speakers.
• “+ PLgz” indicates the front height sound from front height speakers.
For an input signal that can be reproduced in each surround mode, see “Surround modes and parameters” (vpage 104).
45
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 45 2010/08/23 18:32:46
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS
Stereo playback
This is the mode for playing in stereo. The tone can be adjusted.
• Sound is output from the front left and right speakers and subwoofer.
• If multichannel signals are input, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio and are played.
1 Playing the source (vpage 26 –
42).
2 Press STEREO .
Stereo playback begins.
ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA n
Dolby Headphone mode
You can enjoy listening to multi-channel surround sound through headphones using this mode.
• To cancel, press P.DIRECT
again.
• Video signals are only output when HDMI signals are played in the
PURE DIRECT mode.
NOTE
When in the PURE DIRECT mode, the menu screen is not displayed.
Press SURR.
to select the Dolby
Headphone mode.
• If SURROUND MODE on the main unit is pressed, the same function as with the remote control unit can be obtained.
Direct playback
Sound recorded in source is played as is.
• Surround back signals or front height signals are not created.
• In this mode, the following items cannot be adjusted.
• Tone (vpage 73) • MultEQ® XT (vpage 74)
• Dynamic EQ® (vpage 74) • Dynamic Volume® (vpage 75)
• M-DAX (vpage 76)
1 Playing the source (vpage 26 –
42).
2 Press P.DIRECT
direct mode.
to select the
• If PURE DIRECT on the main unit is pressed, the same function as with the remote control unit can be obtained.
Dolby Virtual Speaker/Dolby
Headphone playback
n
Dolby Virtual Speaker mode
This delivers a full surround sound experience from two stereo speakers.
• Sound is output from the front left and right speakers.
• If multichannel signals are input, they are mixed down to 2-channnel audio.
1 Playing the source (vpage 26 –
42).
2 Press
VS”.
SURR.
to select “DOLBY
• Each time SURR.
is pressed, the Dolby
Headphone mode is switched.
DOLBY
HEADPHONE
DOLBY HP
BYPASS
DOLBY HP
PLg Movie
DOLBY HP
PLg Music
This is the surround mode for listening with headphones.
The surround sound field is played through regular headphones.
The sound is played in the normal stereo mode rather than the surround mode when listening with headphones.
This mode is best suited for movie sources.
This mode is best suited for music sources.
• Each time P.DIRECT
is pressed, the direct mode is switched.
NOTE
• The surround mode returns to the previous setting as soon as the plug is removed from the jack.
• You can select Dolby HP PLg Movie or Dolby HP PLg Music when a
2-channel source is played back.
Source Direct This mode plays back tracks at high sound quality without passing through the sound quality adjustment circuits.
Pure Direct original sound quality.
Auto This mode detects the type of input digital signal, and automatically selects the corresponding mode for playback.
z The following circuits that affect sound quality are set to off.
• Main unit’s display circuit (The display is turned off.)
• Analog video input/output circuit
46
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 46 2010/08/23 18:32:46
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 47
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Advanced version
Advanced version
Here, we explain functions and operations that let you make better use of this unit.
F
Speaker installation/connection (Advanced connection) vpage 48
F
Playback (Advanced operation) vpage 55
F
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room) vpage 61
F
How to make detailed settings vpage 63
F
Operating the connected devices by remote control unit vpage 90
47
2010/08/23 18:32:46
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Speaker installation/connection (Advanced connection)
This section provides the installation, connection, and setup methods of speaker systems other than the 7.1-channel system (with surround back speakers).
For the speaker installation, connection, and setup methods of the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers, see “Simple version (Simple setup
guide)” (vpage 4).
Use Audyssey® Auto Setup function of this unit to automatically detect the number of connected speakers and perform optimal settings for the speakers to be used.
Procedure for speaker settings
Install
Connect (vpage 49)
Set up speakers (vpage 52)
Install
This unit is compatible with Audyssey DSX™ (vpage 109) and
Dolby Pro Logic gz (vpage 110), which offers an even wider and deeper surround sensation.
When using Audyssey DSX, install front wide speakers or front height speakers.
When using Dolby Pro Logic gz, install front height speakers.
Install the surround back speakers in a position 2 to 3 ft (60 to 90 cm) higher than ear level.
Surround speaker
Front height speaker
• Point slightly downwards
At least
3.3 ft / 1 m z 1
Front wide speaker z 2
45˚
2 – 3 ft /
60 – 90 cm
Front speaker
Surround back speaker
• Point slightly downwards
G Viewed from the sideH z 1 Recommended for Dolby Pro Logic gz z 2 Recommended for Audyssey DSX
NOTE
Sound is not output simultaneously from the surround back speakers, front height speakers, and front wide speakers. You can switch between speakers by changing the settings in surround mode or
Audyssey DSX.
When 7.1ch (Surround back / Front height / Front wide speaker) installed
FHL
FWL
SL
FL
SW z3 z2 z1
SBL z 1 22˚ – 30˚ z 2 22˚ – 45˚ z 4 90˚ – 110˚ z 5 135˚ – 150˚ z 3 55˚ – 60˚
FL
SW
C
Listening position
C z
4 z
5
SBR
FR
FR
FHR
FWR
SR
When 6.1ch (Surround back speaker) installed
z 1 z 2
SL SR
SB
Listening position z 1 22˚ – 30˚ z 2 90˚ – 110˚
48
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 48 2010/08/23 18:32:47
When 5.1ch installed
FL
SW
C z 1 z 2
SL
Listening position z 1 22˚ – 30˚ z 2 120˚
When Front A/B speakers installed
FR
SR
Install
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Connect
• For the method of connecting the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers, see page 5.
• For the method of connecting the TV, see page 7.
n
Example of connections to Marantz MM7055 and MM7025 power amp
7.1-channel (Surround back / Front height / Front wide speaker) connection
For 7.1-channel (Surround back / Front height / Front wide speaker) playback, set “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage 52) to “Normal”.
G MM7025H
UNBALANCED
BALANCED
G MM7025H
G MM7025H
FL(B) FL(A)
SW
FR(A) FR(B) G MM7055H
FL Front speaker (L)
FR Front speaker (R)
C Center speaker
SW Subwoofer
SL Surround speaker (L)
SR Surround speaker (R)
SB Surround back speaker
Listening position
SBL Surround back speaker (L)
SBR Surround back speaker (R)
FHL Front height speaker (L)
FHR Front height speaker (R)
FWL Front wide speaker (L)
FWR Front wide speaker (R)
FHL
FWL
FL
SW
SL
C
FR
FHR
FWR
SR
SBL SBR
For speaker impedance and speaker cable connections, see power amp user guide.
49
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 49 2010/08/23 18:32:48
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
Connect
6.1-channel (Surround back speaker) connection
If you are using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the UNBALANCED or BALANCED PRE OUT
SBL terminals on the power amp.
For speaker settings in this case, see “When 6.1ch (Surround back speaker) installed” (vpage 48).
For 6.1-channel (Surround back speaker) playback, set “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage 52) to “Normal”.
NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
5.1-channel connection
For 5.1-channel playback, set “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage 52) to “Normal”.
50
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 50
UNBALANCED
BALANCED
G MM7055H
FL
SW
C
FR
G MM7025H
SL SR
SB
SL
FL
SW
C
FR
For speaker impedance and speaker cable connections, see power amp user guide.
UNBALANCED
BALANCED
G MM7055H
SR
2010/08/23 18:32:52
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
Front A/B connection
A second set of front speakers can be connected to the
UNBALANCED PRE OUT HL/HR terminals on the power amp.
In this case, perform the settings using the to be used”).
SPKR A/B button on the remote control or main unit (vpage 26 “Set the front speakers
2.1-channel connection
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Connect
Bi-Amp connection
A bi-amp connection is to connect separate amplifiers to the tweeter terminals and woofer terminals of speakers compatible with the bi-amp function. This prevents the back electromotive force (returned force without output) of the woofer sent to the tweeter, which affects the sound quality of the tweeter, and you can enjoy playback with higher-quality sound.
In this case, set “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage 52) to “SPKR-C”.
UNBALANCED
BALANCED
G MM7025H
FR
G MM7055H
FL SW
G MM7055H
FL(B) FL(A)
SW
FR(A) FR(B) q w
FL FR q w
(L) (R) n
For connecting four subwoofers
Four subwoofers can be connected to this unit.
The same signal is output from each subwoofer terminal.
For surround playback of a multichannel source, if you connect the center speaker, surround speakers, surround back speakers
(or front wide speakers) and subwoofers, 7.1-channel playback is available.
Front speakers can be used separately, depending on the speaker’s specifications or playback source such as front speakers
(A) for multichannel playback and front speakers (B) for 2-channel playback.
When a Bi-Amp connection is used, the same signal is output from the
UNBALANCED and BALANCED PRE OUT FL/FR and SBL/SBR terminals.
For surround playback of a multichannel source, if you connect the center speaker, surround speakers and subwoofers, 5.1-channel playback is available.
NOTE
• Use speakers compatible with bi-amp connections.
• When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the short-circuiting plate or wire between the speaker’s woofer and tweeter terminals.
For speaker impedance and speaker cable connections, see power amp user guide.
51
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 51 2010/08/23 18:32:56
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
Set up speakers
This section provides the setup methods of speaker systems other than the 7.1-channel system
(with surround back speakers).
For the setup methods of the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers, see “Simple
version”, “Set up speakers (Audyssey® Auto Setup)” (vpage 8) of “Simple version”.
First install and connect the speakers to this unit.
Before Auto Setup measurement, the settings shown below can be made.
• Changing the amplifier assignment (Amp Assign)
The signal output from the UNBALANCED and BALANCED PRE OUT SBL/SBR terminals of this unit can be switched to match your speaker environment. (vpage 52 “Set up “Amp Assign””).
• Setting the channels to be used (Channel Select)
If channels that are not to be used are set in advance, measurement for the set channels is skipped, and measuring time can be reduced (vpage 52 “Set up “Channel Select””).
n
Audio output from each PRE OUT terminal
PRE OUT Channel
UNBALANCED PRE
FL/FR C SW1/SW2 SL/SR SBL/SBR
OUT terminal
BALANCED PRE
OUT terminal
FL/FR C SW1/SW2 SL/SR SBL/SBR
Audio Output
Surround
Back *
*The output audio differs depending on the “Amp Assign” settings.
HL/HR WL/WR
-----
Front Height /
Front B
Front Wide
NEDERLANDS
1
Set up the remote control unit
n Set up the operation mode
Press AMP to set the remote control unit to amplifier operation mode.
2 Connect the setup microphone.
When the setup microphone is connected, the following screen is displayed.
SVENSKA
3
Set up “Amp Assign”
Use ui to select “Amp Assign”, and then press ENTER .
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
STEP1 Preparation
Connect the speakers and place them according to the recommendations in the manual.
Set the following items if necessary.
Amp Assign
Channel Select
Auto Setup Start
MultEQ XT
[1/6]
ENTER Enter RETURN
Set use of surround back ch. for your system
Cancel
4 Use o p to select the configuration of the connected speakers, and then press RETURN .
Normal
ZONE2
Set when using surround back, front height or front wide speakers. In this case, go to step
5.
Set for connecting the speakers for ZONE2.
ZONE3
SPKR-C
Set for connecting the speakers for ZONE3.
Set for connecting the tweeter of the front speaker to the
UNBALANCED and BALANCED
PRE OUT SBL/SBR terminals of the power amp, and the woofer of the front speaker to the FL/FR terminals.
Press AMP
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
STEP1 Preparation
Connect the speakers and place them according to the recommendations in the manual.
Set the following items if necessary.
Amp Assign
Channel Select
Auto Setup Start
ENTER
Start Auto Setup
Enter
MultEQ XT
RETURN
[1/6]
Cancel
around items indicate the settings.
5
Set up “Channel Select”
Use ui to select “Channel Select”, and then press ENTER .
AUTO SETUP
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
STEP1 Preparation
Connect the speakers and place them according to the recommendations in the manual.
Set the following items if necessary.
Amp Assign
Channel Select
Auto Setup Start
MultEQ XT
[1/6]
ENTER Enter RETURN
Skip unused ch’s measurement for timesaving
Cancel
6 Use ui to select a channel.
Subwoofer Select for no subwoofers to be used. In this case, go to step 7.
Surround
Back
Select for no surround back speakers to be used. In this case, go to step 8.
• “Surround Back” can be set when
“Amp Assign” is set to “Normal”.
Front
Height
Select for no front height speakers to be used. In this case, go to step
9.
• “Front Height” can be set when
“Amp Assign” is set to “Normal”.
Front Wide Select for no front wide speakers to be used. In this case, go to step 9.
• “Front Wide” can be set when
“Amp Assign” is set to “Normal”.
7
G When “Subwoofer” is selected in
step 6H
Use o p to select the item.
Measure Set for measuring a subwoofer.
Skip Set for no measuring of a subwoofer.
52
Remote control operation buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 52 2010/08/23 18:32:57
Set up speakers
8
G When “Surround Back” is selected
in step 6H
Use o p to select the item.
Measure
(2spkrs)
Set for measuring two surround back speakers.
Measure
(1spkr)
Set for measuring a surround back speaker.
Skip Set for no measuring of a surround back speaker.
9
G When “Front Height” or “Front
Wide” is selected in step 6H
Use o p to select the item.
Measure Set to measure the front height speakers or front wide speakers.
Skip Set when you do not want to measure the front height speakers or front wide speakers.
10 Press RETURN .
Proceed to page 9 STEP1 Preparation step 5.
NOTE
After performing Audyssey® Auto Setup, do not change the speaker connections or subwoofer volume. In event of a change, perform Audyssey
Auto Setup again.
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO
Connections (Advanced connection)
FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
REMOTE CONTROL jacks
When you use this unit connected to Marantz audio components, it sends operation signals to operate each component.
n
Connection
Use the remote connection cable (supplied with a Marantz audio component you want to connect) to connect the REMOTE CONTROL OUT terminal of this unit to the REMOTE CONTROL IN terminal of the component to be connected.
n
Setting
Set the remote control switch located on the rear panel of the connected audio component to “EXTERNAL” or “EXT.” to use this feature.
• This setting will disable remote sensor reception of the connected audio component.
• To operate the connected audio component, point the remote control at the remote sensor of this unit.
Wireless receiver RX101 (vpage 23)
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 53
Remote control operation buttons
Remote control unit
NOTE
To use wireless receiver RX101 as external
IR receiver, set the remote sensor function of this unit to “Remote Lock:ON” (vpage 89
“Remote control settings”).
REMOTE
CONTROL
IN OUT
CD recorder
EXTERNAL INTERNAL
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT IN
MM7025
REMOTE
CONTROL
IN OUT
DVD player
EXTERNAL INTERNAL
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT IN
MM7055
REMOTE
CONTROL
IN OUT
CD player
EXTERNAL INTERNAL
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
53
2010/08/23 18:32:59
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO
RS-232C connector
When you connect an external control device, you can control this unit with the external control device.
External serial controller
ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS
DC OUT (TRIGGER OUT) jacks
SVENSKA
When a device with DC IN jack is connected, the connected device’s power on/standby can be controlled through linked operation to this unit.
The DC OUT jack outputs a maximum 12 V/150 mA electrical signal.
12 V/150 mA trigger-compatible device
Perform the operation below beforehand.
q Turn on the power of this unit.
w Turn off the power of this unit from the external controller.
e Check that the unit is in the standby mode.
in Set as Necessary
Set to change the conditions for linked operation via the DC OUT
1 or 2 jack.
“Trigger Out 1” or “Trigger Out 2” (vpage 85)
NOTE
If the permissible trigger input level for the connected device is larger than 12V/150 mA, or has shorted, the DC OUT jack cannot be used.
In this case, turn off the power to the unit, and disconnect it.
54
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 54 2010/08/23 18:33:01
SVENSKA
Playback (Advanced operation)
Playback (Basic operation) (vpage 25)
Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode)
(vpage 44) n HDMI control function (vpage 55) n Sleep timer function (vpage 56) n Adjusting the volume of the speakers (vpage 56) n Operating a wireless LAN-compatible mobile
terminal to play music and still pictures (vpage 57) n Web control function (vpage 58) n Panel lock function (vpage 60) n Various memory functions (vpage 60)
NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Convenient functions
HDMI control function
When you make an HDMI connection with a TV or player compatible with this unit and HDMI control functions, you can perform the following operations by setting the HDMI control function of each device.
n This unit power off can be linked to the TV power off step.
n You can switch audio output devices with a TV operation.
When you set “Output audio from amp” in the TV audio output setup operation, you can switch the amp power on.
n You can adjust this unit volume in the TV volume adjustment operation.
n You can switch this unit input sources through linkage to TV input switching.
n When playing the player, this unit input source switches to the source for that player.
1
2
3
4
Set the HDMI output connector corresponding with the HDMI control function.
Set “HDMI Control” (vpage 80) to “ON“.
Set the HDMI control function for all equipment connected by HDMI cable.
• Please consult the operating instructions for the connected equipment to check the settings.
• Carry out steps 2 and 3 should any of the equipment be unplugged.
Switch the television input to the HDMI input connected to this unit.
5 Switch this unit input to the HDMI input source and check if the picture from the player is ok.
6
Turn the power on for all the equipment connected by HDMI cable.
When you turn the TV’s power to standby, check that the power of this unit also goes to standby.
NOTE
• The HDMI control function only supports the HDMI OUT 1 connector.
To use the HDMI control function, connect the television to the
HDMI OUT 1 connector.
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “ON”, it consumes more standby power.
• The HDMI control function controls operations of a TV that is compatible with the HDMI control function. Make sure that the TV and HDMI are connected when you perform HDMI control.
• Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV or player. Check the user guide of each device for details beforehand.
• When “Power Off Control” on the menu is set to “OFF” (vpage 81), this unit is not set to standby even if the connected device is in the standby mode.
• When connection changes are implemented, such as adding connections to HDMI devices, linked operations may be initialized.
In this case, you will need to reconfi gure the settings.
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “ON”, it is not possible to assign an
HDMI connector to “TV” at “Input Assign” (vpage 69).
If the HDMI control function does not operate properly, check the following points.
• Is the TV or player compatible with the HDMI control function?
• Is “HDMI Control” (vpage 80) set to “ON”?
• Is “Power Off Control” (vpage 81) set to “All” or “Video”?
• Are the HDMI control function settings of all equipment correct?
• Is the television connected to the HDMI OUT 1 connector?
NOTE
Should any of the operations below be performed, the interlocking function may be reset, in which case, repeat steps 2 and 3.
• “Input Assign” – “HDMI” (vpage 69) setting has changed.
• “Monitor Out” (vpage 80) setting is changed.
• There is a change to the connection between the equipment and the
HDMI, or an increase in equipment.
55
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 55 2010/08/23 18:33:02
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS
Convenient functions
Sleep timer function
The power automatically goes into standby once the set time has elapsed.
This is convenient for playing sources while going to sleep.
1 Press AMP to set the remote control unit to amplifier operation mode.
2 Press SLEEP and display the time you want to set.
The indicator on the display lights.
• If SLLEP on the main unit is pressed, the same function as with the remote control unit can be obtained.
ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
Front Rear
NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Adjusting the volume of the speakers
You can adjust the channel level either according to the playback sources or to suit your taste, as described below.
n
Adjusting the volume of the different speakers
1 Press AMP to set the remote control unit to amplifier operation mode.
2 Press CH LVL .
CHANNEL LEVEL
Front L
Front R
Center
Subwoofer
Surround L
Surround R
S.Back L
S.Back R
Fader
Select n
Adjusting the volume of groups of speakers
(Fader function)
This function lets you adjust (fade) the sound all at once from the front (front speaker / front height speaker / front wide speaker / center speaker) or rear (surround speaker / surround back speaker).
1 Press AMP to set the remote control unit to amplifier operation mode.
2 Press CH LVL .
CHANNEL LEVEL
Front L
Front R
Center
Subwoofer
Surround L
Surround R
S.Back L
S.Back R
Fader
Select
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
Front Rear
• The time switches as shown below each time SLEEP is pressed.
OFF 10 min 20 30 40 50
120 110 100 90 80 70 60
To cancel the sleep timer
Press SLEEP to set “OFF”.
The indicator on the display turns off.
3 Use ui to select the speaker.
The speaker that can be set switches each time one of the buttons is pressed.
4 Use o p to adjust the volume.
• In the case of a subwoofer, pressing o when it is at “–12 dB” will change the setting to “OFF”.
3
4
Press i to select “Fader”, then select the item to be
adjusting using o p.
Use o p to adjust the volume of the speakers.
(o : front, p: rear)
• The fader function does not affect the subwoofer.
• The fader can be adjusted until the volume of the speaker is adjusted to the lowest value of –12 dB.
• When a headphone jack is inserted, the headphone channel level can be adjusted.
• When the input mode setting is “7.1CH IN”, you can adjust the channel level while the 7.1CH INPUT connector is being used. In that case, “7.1CH IN Level” appears at the top of the screen.
• The sleep timer setting is canceled if this unit’s power is set to standby or turned off.
• When power to the main zone is turned off with the sleep timer, power in ZONE2 and ZONE3 are also turned off.
56
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 56 2010/08/23 18:33:03
e Start playback.
r Operate.
SVENSKA q Select content.
NEDERLANDS
Operating a wireless LAN-compatible mobile terminal to play music and still pictures
• Perform this procedure using a wireless LAN-compatible mobile terminal conforming to the DLNA (Digital
Living Network Alliance) standard.
• This function allows you to play content located on a computer (media server) or mobile terminal device connected on a network by operating a mobile terminal device on the same network.
• There are two types of operations on the mobile terminal device.
n
Playing content on a computer (Media server)
This unit
Wireless LANcompatible router
Computer
(Media server)
Streaming Streaming
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS n
Playing contents on a mobile terminal device
This unit
Wireless LANcompatible router
DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Convenient functions
Mobile terminal device e Start playback.
r Operate.
q Select content.
w Select a player.
1 Select the content you want to play from among the mobile terminal devices.
2 From the mobile terminal device, select this unit from among the products on the network.
Playback of the content selected in step 1 begins.
• When selecting this unit from the mobile terminal device, the name of this unit is displayed at “Friendly
Name” (vpage 82 “Friendly Name Edit”).
• The following operations are possible from the mobile terminal device:
• File operations (play, stop, pause, track search)
• Volume adjustment w Select a player.
Mobile terminal device
1 From the mobile terminal device, browse the media server on the same network and choose the content you want to play.
2 From the mobile terminal device, select this unit from among the products on the network.
Playback of the content selected in step 1 begins.
• When selecting this unit from the mobile terminal device, the name of this unit is displayed at “Friendly
Name” (vpage 82 “Friendly Name Edit”).
• The following operations are possible from the mobile terminal device:
• File operations (play, stop, pause, track search)
• Volume adjustment
• is displayed on the menu screen while the mobile terminal device is being operated.
• For the various settings and operating procedures, see the operating instructions of the mobile terminal devices being used.
• When selecting this unit from the mobile terminal device, the name of this unit is displayed at “Friendly
Name”. “Friendly Name” can be edited at “Friendly Name Edit” (vpage 82) as desired so that it is easily distinguishable from other devices.
• When playback is started from the mobile terminal device, this unit’s input source automatically switches to “NET/USB”. Also, when the “Network Standby” setting (vpage 82) is set to “ON”, the power automatically turns on.
NOTE
When operations related to browsing or playback (play, stop, pause, track search) are performed on this unit while operating the mobile terminal device, the connection to the network is disconnected.
57
2010/08/23 18:33:03 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 57
ENGLISH DEUTSCH
Convenient functions
Web control function
You can operate this unit using a browser.
1 Switch the “Network Standby” setting to “ON”.
(vpage 82).
2 Check the IP address of this unit with “Network
Information” (vpage 83).
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP
NETWORK INFORMATION
Friendly Name marantz:[AV7005]
DHCP ON
IP Address 192.168.100.19
MAC Address ************
Checking the IP address.
File http://192.168.100.19/index.asp
Edit View Favorites Tools Help
INDEX
Marantz Web Controller
AV7005
MAIN ZONE
Status
-25.0dB
Status
ZONE2
-25dB
Status
ZONE3
-60dB
FRANÇAIS
RETURN Return
3 Enter the IP address of this unit in browser’s address box.
For example, if the IP address of this unit is “192.168.100.19”, enter “http://192.168.100.19”.
q
ITALIANO
4
ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
When the top menu is displayed, click on the menu item you want to operate.
w
MAIN ZONE
Status
-25.0dB
Status
ZONE2
-25dB
Status
ZONE3
-60dB r e t
Setup Menu
PDA Menu
Wed Control Config.
w Click when you operate each zone. (vGExample 1H) e Click when you operate the setup menu. (vGExample 2H) r Click to change the Web control screen setting.
(vGExample 3H) t Click when you operate a small screen such as a PDA screen, etc. (vGExample 4H)
5 Operate.
ZONE CONTROL >
CHANNEL LEVEL >
NET AUDIO / USB > iPod Direct >
G Example 1H Main zone control screen
MAIN ZONE
POWER
Sleep Timer y
SOURCE
ON
NET/USB
STANDBY u
RELOAD
TOP MENU
Add To Your Favorite o
Player
Video
Network
Tuner
∞ -80 -70
<
-60
-75.5dB
-50 -40 -30
>
-20 -10 0 10 18
Note
To use the web control function,set the GUI menu “Manual Setup” - “Network Setup” -
“Other” -“Network Standby” setting to “ON” y Click to perform individual operations.
Changes to individual operation screens. (vGExample 5H) u Click when you update to the latest information.
Normally, there is a change to the latest information each time you operate. When operating from the main unit, click this or else the screen will not be updated.
i Click to return to the top menu.
Displayed when setting “Top Menu Link Setup” to “ON” in
G Example 3H o Click to add a setting to “Favorites” in your browser.
We recommend registering the setting screens for the different zones in the browser’s favorites so as not to accidentally perform menu operations for zones you do not intend to operate.
q Entering the IP address.
Setup Menu
Wed Control Config.
58
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 58 2010/08/23 18:33:04
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO
SETUP MENU
SAVE
LOAD
Q0
SOURCE SELECT
AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST
MANUAL SETUP
INFORMATION
Q1
G Example 2H Setup menu screen
SOURCE SELECT ReLoad
Source DVD
Input Assign
Q2
Video
Video Select
Video Mode
Video Convert
SOURCE
Auto
ON i/p Scaler
Resolution(analog)
Resolution(HDMI)
Progressive Mode
Aspect
Q3
Game
OFF
Movie
Analog Analog & HDMI OFF
Auto 480p/576p 1080i 720p 1080p 1080p:24Hz
Auto 480p/576p 1080i 720p 1080p 1080p:24Hz
AUTO VIDEO1 VIDEO2
Full Normal
G Example 4H PDA menu screen
Marantz Web Controller
Main Zone Control
Multi Zone2 Control
Multi Zone3 Control
Q8
Q8 Select this item to operate each zone.
Input Mode
Input Mode
Decode Mode
Auto
Auto
Rename DVD Set Def Q4
Q5
NOTE
You cannot change setup menu operations and zone name on the
PDA menu screen.
Source Level(analog) <
Web Controller Config.
Q6
Q7
0 dB < Set
Source Level(digital) < 0 dB < Set
Q0 Click the menu item from which you want to make settings.
>
Q1 Click “SAVE” when you want to save settings, and click
“LOAD” when you want to call settings.
Q2 Click “v” and select from the displayed items.
Q3 Click an item to make a setting.
CHANNEL LEVEL >
NET AUDIO/USB > iPod Direct
Q4 After entering characters, click “Set” to set, or click “Def” to return to default setting.
Q5 Enter fi gures or click “<” or “>” to make the setting, and then click “Set”.
RELOAD
>
G Example 3H Web confi guration screen
Top Menu Link Setup
ON OFF
Back Top Menu
Q6 Click “ON” when performing Top Menu Link Setup.
When set up, return to the top menu from each operation screen.
(Default setting : “OFF”)
Q7 Click this item to return to the top menu.
G Example 5H Net Audio operating screen
NET AUDIO/USB(MAIN ZONE)
Now Playing
HOT LOVE & EMOTION
/VIRGINELLE
128kbps
W0
Q9
W1 W2
W3
W4
PRESET OFF
< -75.5dB
PRESET MEMORY
ONE
∞ -80
REPEAT
ALL
-70 -60
A1 MEMORY
OFF
-50 -40 -30
CHARACTER SEARCH
RANDOM
ON OFF
-20 -10 0 10 18
W6
W5
>
Q9 Click the menu items. from which you want to play.
W0 Click “v” to select the preset channel you want to play.
W1 When registering presets, click “v” to select the channel you want to register, and then click “MEMORY”.
W2 When searching using an acronym, click “v” and select from the displayed characters.
W3 Click this item to play back repeatedly.
W4 Click this item when selecting menu items.
W5 Click to stop playback.
W6 Click this item to play back randomly.
FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Convenient functions
G Example 6H Dedicated iPod Touch screen
Main Zone
Zone Power
Source iPod Direct NetAudio/USB
Volume
Down Up
-60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0
• When accessed from the iPod Touch browser, an optimized operation screen is displayed.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 59
59
2010/08/23 18:33:04
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO
Convenient functions
Panel lock function
To prevent accidental operation of this unit, you can disable operation of the buttons on the front panel.
n
Disabling all key button operations
ON/STANDBY
ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS n
Canceling the Panel lock function
ON/STANDBY i
SVENSKA
Various memory functions
n
Personal memory plus function
This function sets the settings (input mode, surround mode, HDMI output mode, MultEQ® XT, Dynamic EQ®, Dynamic Volume®, audio delay etc.) last selected for the individual input sources.
DISPLAY
Press ON/STANDBY while you press and hold i and
DISPLAY with the unit in standby mode.
The Panel lock function is canceled.
AUTO DISPLAY
Press ON/STANDBY while you press and hold AUTO and
DISPLAY with the unit in standby mode.
“Panel Lock:ON” appears on the display and all button operations except ON/STANDBY are disabled.
n
Disabling all button operations except VOLUME
ON/STANDBY VOLUME
Even when the Panel lock function is set, you can operate the unit using the remote control unit.
The surround parameters, tone settings and the volumes of the different speakers are stored for the individual surround modes. n
Last function memory
This function stores the settings which were made before going into the standby mode.
When the power is turned back on, the settings are restored.
PURE DIRECT DISPLAY
Press ON/STANDBY while you press and hold PURE
DIRECT and DISPLAY with the unit in standby mode.
“Panel Lock:ON” appears on the display and all button operations except ON/STANDBY and VOLUME are disabled.
60
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 60 2010/08/23 18:33:05
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room)
• You can operate this unit so as to enjoy audio in a room (ZONE2, ZONE3) other than the MAIN ZONE
(room where the unit is located).
• You can simultaneously play back the same source in both the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3. You can also play back separate sources in the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3.
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO
“Amp Assign” setting
(vpage 78) and audio signals output
FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH
Connecting the speakers
ENGLISH
Audio output
There are two methods to do this, as described below. Choose one of the methods.
q Zone playback by audio output(UNBALANCED and BALANCED) w Zone playback by audio output (PRE OUT)
Use an external amplifier.
q
Zone playback by audio output (UNBALANCED and BALANCED)
Using the amplifier assign function, zone 2 and zone 3 auto signals are output from this unit’s UNBALANCED and BALANCED PRE OUT SBL/SBR terminals.
n
Connecting and setting the speakers
(Example of connections to Marantz MM7025 power amp)
“Amp Assign” setting
(vpage 78) and audio signals output
Connecting the speakers
ZONE3
ZONE3
Output signal :
Stereo (L / R)
UNBALANCED
BALANCED
ZONE3
(L) w q w
(R) q w
Zone playback by audio output (PRE OUT)
n
Audio connections (ZONE2, ZONE3)
The audio signals of this unit’s ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output terminals are output to the ZONE2 and
ZONE3 amplifiers and played on these amplifiers.
ZONE2 MAIN ZONE ZONE3
ZONE2
ZONE2
ZONE2
Output signal :
Stereo (L / R)
L
R
This unit
L
R w
(L) q w
(R) q
AUX IN AUX IN
UNBALANCED
BALANCED
We recommend using high quality pin-plug cables for audio connections in order to prevent noise.
NOTE
• When the input source to which the digital input connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) are assigned is selected in ZONE2 or ZONE3, playback is only possible if the digital signal being input is in PCM (2-channel) format.
• It is not possible to play the digital audio signals input from the HDMI terminals in ZONE2 and ZONE3.
Use analog connections for ZONE2 or ZONE3 playback.
• When certain digital signals are being input, noise may be output from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors.
• The menu screen is not output.
61
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 61 2010/08/23 18:33:06
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO
Video output
Video Connection
The video signals of this unit’s ZONE2 video output terminal are played by the ZONE2 TV.
MAIN ZONE ZONE2
This unit
VIDEO
ZONE2
VIDEO
IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
Y P B P R
NOTE
• It is not possible to output video signals input to the HDMI terminals to ZONE2.
• When using component output terminal 2 for ZONE2 video signal output, set “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “Component2
Output” (vpage 85) in the menu to “ZONE2”.
• The menu screen is not output.
ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Playback
1 Press Z2 or Z3 to switch the remote control operating mode.
The remote control unit switches to the operating mode for ZONE2 or ZONE3.
2 Press ON to turn on the ZONE2 or ZONE3 power.
The or indicator on the display lights.
• When STANDBY
ZONE3 turns off.
is pressed, ZONE2 or
• Power in ZONE2 or ZONE3 can be turned on or off by pressing SOURCE ON/OFF .
• Power in ZONE2 or ZONE3 can be turned on or off by pressing ZONE2 ON/OFF
ZONE3 ON/OFF on the main unit.
or
3 Press INPUT df .
The audio signal of the selected source is output to ZONE2 or
ZONE3.
• Turn INPUT SELECTOR after pressing ZONE SELECT on the main unit to select an input source.
Adjusting the volume
Use VOLUME to adjust the volume.
G Adjustable rangeH – – – –80dB – –40dB – 18dB
(When the “Volume Display” (vpage 84) setting is “Relative”)
G Adjustable rangeH 0 – 41 – 99
(When the “Volume Display” (vpage 84) setting is “Absolute”)
• At time of purchase, “Volume Limit” (vpage 83) is set to “–10dB
(71)”.
Turn VOLUME after pressing ZONE SELECT on the main unit to adjust the sound volume.
Turning off the sound temporarily
Press MUTE .
The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” (vpage 84) in the menu.
• To cancel, either adjust the volume or press MUTE again.
• The setting is canceled when the zone’s power is turned off.
You can adjust the tone and volume for ZONE2 and ZONE3 in “Zone
Setup” (vpage 83) in the menu.
When power for both MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 is set to ON, power of the MAIN ZONE only can be turned off. Select “AMP” in step 1 then press STANDBY .
62
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 62 2010/08/23 18:33:06
SVENSKA
How to make detailed settings
Menu map
For menu operation, connect a TV to this unit and display the menu on the TV screen. For menu operations, see the following page.
Setting items
1. Audio/Video Adjust
AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST
Audio Adjust
Picture Adjust
2. Information
INFORMATION
MENU
Audio/Video Adjust
Information
Auto Setup
Manual Setup
Input Setup
Audio Input Signal
HDMI Information
Preset Channel
3. Auto Setup
Adjust various audio and video parameters
Items that only need to be set once
Set these for example upon purchase.
Once these items are set, there is no need to set them again unless the speaker layout or the connected speakers have been changed.
NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL
Detailed items
Audio Adjust
Picture Adjust
Status
Audio Input Signal
HDMI Information
Preset Channel
Audyssey Auto Setup
Parameter Check
Audyssey Auto Setup
Parameter Check
4. Manual Setup
MANUAL SETUP
Speaker Setup
Optimize settings for speakers in use
Audio Setup
Network Setup
Zone Setup
Option Setup
Speaker Setup
HDMI Setup
Audio Setup
Network Setup
Zone Setup
Option Setup
5. Input Setup
(Example: “HD Radio”)
Make detailed speaker settings
INPUT SETUP
Auto Preset
Preset Skip
Preset Name
Video
Rename
Source Level
Displayed items of the “Input Setup” menu differs, depending on the selected input source.
Auto Preset
Preset Skip
Parental Lock
Antenna Aiming
Preset Name
Input Assign
Video
Input Mode
Rename
Source Level
Playback Mode
Still Picture
ITALIANO FRANÇAIS
Adjuts various audio parameters.
Description
Adjusts the picture quality.
DEUTSCH
Shows information about current settings.
Shows information about audio input signals.
Displays the HDMI input/output signals and HDMI monitor information.
Shows information about tuner or network preset channels.
ENGLISH
Makes the optimum settings for the speakers being used automatically.
Checks Audyssey® Auto Setup measurement results.
This item is only displayed after Audyssey Auto Setup procedure has been performed.
Sets the speaker size and distance, the channel level, etc.
Makes settings for HDMI video/audio output.
Makes settings for audio playback.
Makes network settings.
Makes settings for audio playback in a multi-zone (ZONE2/ZONE3) system.
Makes various other settings.
Uses the auto preset function to program radio stations.
Sets the preset memories that you do not want to display when tuning.
Sets the Parental Lock.
Adjusts the SIRIUS reception sensitivity.
Assigns name to a preset memory.
Changes input connector assignment.
Makes the video settings.
Sets the audio input mode and decode mode.
Changes the display name for this source.
Adjusts the playback level of the audio input.
Makes settings for iPod, USB memory device or network source playback.
Makes settings for still picture playback.
Page
73
77
78
80
81
81
83
84
68
69
71
71
71
67
67
67
68
68
71
72
88
88
88
88
8
12
63
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 63 2010/08/23 18:33:07
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
Examples of menu and front display
Below we describe typical examples of displays on the TV screen and on the set’s display window.
Menu display
Top menu display
w
MENU
Audio/Video Adjust
Information
Auto Setup
Manual Setup
Input Setup q
NEDERLANDS
Front display
*MENU
A/V Adjust – w
Display when changing settings
Display when inputting characters
Adjust various audio and video parameters w
INPUT SETUP
INPUT ASSIGN
Default
BD
DVD
VCR
SAT
GAME
AUX1
TV
[ HDMI ] q
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI4
HDMI3
HDMI5
HDMI6
None
[ DIGITAL ]
None
Coax1
None
Coax2
None
Opt3
Opt1
[ COMP ]
1-RCA
2-RCA
4-RCA
3-RCA
None
None
None
Select ENTER Enter RETURN
Change HDMI input connector assignment
Return
Press ENTER .
INPUT SETUP
INPUT ASSIGN
[ HDMI ] Default
BD
DVD
VCR
SAT
GAME
AUX1
TV e
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI4
HDMI3
HDMI5
HDMI6
None
[ DIGITAL ]
None
Coax1
None
Coax2
None
Opt3
Opt1
Select ENTER Enter
Assign HDMI 1 input connector
[ COMP ]
1-RCA
2-RCA
4-RCA
3-RCA
None
None
None
RETURN Cancel
INPUT SETUP
RENAME
DVD
Default
DVD w q
*Input Assign
BD [HDMI1 ] q
Press ENTER .
*Input Assign
BD •HDMI1 – e
*Rename:DVD
•DVD – q
Display when resetting
SHIFT
Input a/A
ENTER
SEARCH
Enter
Keyboard
RETURN Cancel
INPUT SETUP
RENAME q
DVD
Default
DVD
*Rename
Default q
Press ENTER .
SVENSKA
Description q The menu items are displayed here.
w The selected line is displayed here.
The currently selected item is displayed on the display.
Use ui to move to the item you want to set.
q Use uio p to move to the item you want to set.
w Press ENTER to set to the mode in which the setting can be made.
e “ 0 ” and “ 1 ” is displayed at the sides of item whose setting can be changed. Use o p to change to the desired setting.
q When w When o p ui
is pressed, the cursor moves to the left or right.
is pressed at the position where you want to input the character, the character is input.
For inputting characters on a keyboard screen or with the number buttons on the remote control unit, see page 65. q Press w Press i to select “Default”, then press ENTER to set.
o to select “Yes”, then press ENTER .
ENTER Enter RETURN Return
*Rename
Default? :•No
64
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 64 2010/08/23 18:33:08
Inputting characters
You can change the names as desired using the “Preset Name”
(vpage 68), “Rename” (vpage 71), “Rhapsody Account” (vpage 83),
“Napster Account” (vpage 83), “Zone Rename” (vpage 85) and character input for the network functions.
For inputting characters, there are three methods, as shown below.
Method for inputting characters
Method
Using the cursor buttons
(Normal screen)
Operations
• Operating with the remote control unit or the main unit.
• Use uio p and ENTER to input characters.
Using the keyboard screen
• Operating with the remote control unit.
• Select a character on the TV screen to input characters.
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
Edit
Default
SEARCH
Input
Keyboard
ENTER
INSERT
Enter
Insert q Character input section w Guide for operation buttons
ESPAÑOL
G Account input / Search by text / Proxy Name /
Friendly Name EditH
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP OTHER
FRIENDLY NAME EDIT m arantz:[AV7005]
RETURN
DELETE
Cancel
Delete q w
Normal screen
n
Display of a normal input screen
G Rename / Zone RenameH
INPUT SETUP
RENAME
DVD
Default
SHIFT
Input a/A
D VD w
ENTER
SEARCH
Enter
Keyboard
RETURN Cancel q
ITALIANO
Using the cursor buttons
1 Display the screen for inputting characters
(vpage 63 “Menu map”).
2 Use o p to set the cursor to the character you want to change.
3 Use ui to change the character, then press ENTER .
• The types of characters that can be input are as shown below.
G Upper case charactersH
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
G Lower case charactersH abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
G SymbolsH ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) z + , - . / : ; <
= > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ˜
G NumbersH 0123456789 (Space)
• The input character type can be switched by pressing
MENU while the display name is being changed.
SHIFT/TOP
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change the name then press
ENTER to register it. e r t e r t
FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH
Keyboard screen
n
Display of a keyboard input screen
G Rename / Zone RenameH
INPUT SETUP
RENAME
BD
0
$
A
N
1
%
B
O
2
&
C
P
’
3
D
Q
(
4
E
R w
)
5
F
S
BD
G
T
6 z
7
+
H
U
,
8
I
V
;
9
J
W
!
<
K
X
”
=
L
Y
#
>
M
Z
SHIFT
Select a/A
ENTER
SEARCH
Input
Normal
ENGLISH
RETURN Cancel
G Account input / Search by text / Proxy Name /
Friendly Name EditH
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP OTHER
FRIENDLY NAME EDIT
0
_ a n
Edit w
1
/ b o
:
2 c p
3
˜ d q
4
?
e r marantz:[AV7005]
[
5 f s
6
\ t g
]
7 h u
8
^ i v
9
ˋ j w
{
.
k x
|
@ l y
}
m z
Clear Space 0 1 Ins Del O K
SHIFT
Select a/A y
ENTER
SEARCH
Input
Normal o Q0
RETURN Cancel q u i q Character input section w Cursor e Keyboard section r Clear key t Space key y Cursor keys u OK key i Guide for operation buttons o Insert key
Q0 Delete key q u i
65
2010/08/23 18:33:09 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 65
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS
Inputting characters
1 Display the screen for inputting characters
(vpage 63 “Menu map”).
2 Press SEARCH/INFO while a normal screen is displayed.
A keyboard screen is displayed.
3 Select a character to be changed. q or .
w uio
ENTER p to select
to place the cursor at the character to be changed.
Each time ENTER is pressed, the cursor moves by one character.
4 Select a character to be input with press ENTER . uio p then
• The types of characters that can be input are as shown below.
G Upper case characters/Numbers/SymbolsH
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123456789
! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) z + , ; < = >
G Lower case characters/Numbers/SymbolsH abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789
. @ - _ / : ˜ ? [ \ ] ^ ` { | }
• The input character type can be switched by pressing
MENU while the display name is being changed.
SHIFT/TOP
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to change the name.
6 Use uio p to select , then press ENTER .
ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Input Setup
Perform settings related to input source playback.
• You do not have to change the settings to use the unit. Make settings when needed.
Menu operation
1 Press mode.
AMP to set the remote control unit to amplifier operation
2 Press MENU .
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3 Use ui to select the menu to be set or operated.
4 Press ENTER or p to enter the setting.
• To return to the previous item, press RETURN .
• Exiting the Menu, press MENU while the menu is displayed.
The menu display disappears.
Important information
n
About the display of input sources
In this section, the configurable input sources for each item are shown as follows.
BD DVD VCR SAT GAME AUX1 NET/USB TV CD CDR PHONO SIRIUS
HD Radio M-XPort
NOTE
Input sources that have been set to “Delete” at “Source Delete” (vpage 84) cannot be selected.
66
Remote control operation buttons
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 66
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
2010/08/23 18:33:09
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
Items that can be set with the Input Setup procedure
Auto Preset (vpage 67) Preset Skip (vpage 67)
INPUT SETUP
AUTO PRESET
Start
ENTER
Start the auto preset process
Enter RETURN Return
Antenna Aiming (vpage 68)
INPUT SETUP
ANTENNA AIMING
Satellite
Terrestrial
INPUT SETUP
PRESET SKIP
Block
A Block Presets
A1 FM 87.50MHz
A2 FM 87.90MHz
A3 FM 89.10MHz
A4 FM 93.30MHz
A5 FM 97.90MHz
A6 AM 98.10MHz
A7 AM 98.90MHz
A8 AM 100.10MHz
ON
ON
ON
ON
A
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
[1/7]
RETURN Return
Change memory blocks
Preset Name (vpage 68)
INPUT SETUP
PRESET NAME
Block
A1 FM 87.50MHz
A2 FM 87.90MHz
A3 FM 89.10MHz
A4 FM 93.30MHz
A5 FM 97.90MHz
A6 AM 98.10MHz
A7 AM 98.90MHz
A8 AM 100.10MHz
[1/7]
A
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
Parental Lock (vpage 67)
INPUT SETUP
PARENTAL LOCK
Lock Setting
Edit Lock Code
Set a listening limit to any channel
Input Assign (vpage 68)
Default
BD
DVD
VCR
SAT
GAME
AUX1
TV
INPUT SETUP
INPUT ASSIGN
[ HDMI ]
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI4
HDMI3
HDMI5
HDMI6
None
[ DIGITAL ]
None
Coax1
None
Coax2
None
Opt3
Opt1
[ COMP ]
1-RCA
2-RCA
4-RCA
3-RCA
None
None
None
Adjust antenna position for best signal
RETURN Return
Video (vpage 69)
INPUT SETUP
VIDEO
RETURN Return
Change memory blocks
Input Mode (vpage 71)
INPUT SETUP
INPUT MODE
Select ENTER Enter RETURN
Change HDMI input connector assignment
Return
Rename (vpage 71)
INPUT SETUP
RENAME
Input Mode
Decode Mode
Auto
Auto
DVD
Default
DVD Video Select
Video Mode
Video Convert i/p Scaler
Resolution(Analog)
Resolution(HDMI)
Progressive Mode
Aspect
Source
Auto
ON
Analog & HDMI
Auto
Auto
Auto
Full
RETURN Return
Select desired video input source
Source Level (vpage 71)
INPUT SETUP
SOURCE LEVEL
Analog Input
Digital Input
0dB
0dB
RETURN
Automatically detect input signal and playback
Return
Playback Mode (vpage 71)
INPUT SETUP
PLAYBACK MODE
Repeat
Random
OFF
OFF
RETURN Return
Still Picture (vpage 72)
INPUT SETUP
STILL PICTURE
Slide Show
Interval
OFF
5sec
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Input Setup
Auto Preset
Use the auto preset function to program radio stations.
Setting items
Start
Start the auto preset process.
Setting details
If an FM station cannot be preset automatically, select the desired station by tuning it in manually, then preset it manually.
HD Radio
Preset Skip
Default settings are underlined.
Set preset channel to be skipped when selecting.
Setting items
A – G
Set the preset channels you do not want to display. You can set by preset memory block (A to G) or by preset channel (1 to 8).
Setting details
1 – 8 : Set by individual preset channels in the currently selected preset memory block.
• ON : Display the selected preset channel.
• Skip : Do not display the selected preset channel.
If you set “Block Presets” to “Skip”, you can skip the preset memory blocks (A to G).
SIRIUS HD Radio
Parental Lock
Default settings are underlined.
For any channel, set the radio reception limits.
Setting items
Lock Setting
Set the channel radio reception limits.
SIRIUS
Setting details
1. Press ui to select “Lock Setting”, and then press p or ENTER .
2. Pressing
ENTER .
uio p , input the password (4 digits number) and press
3. Select channel by pressing ui , and set the lock by pressing o p .
Unlock : Do not lock selected channel(s).
Lock : Lock selected channel(s). When a Parental Locked channel is tuned, “Enter Lock Code” is displayed, then input the password.
RETURN
Compensate analog audio input playback level
Return
Cancel repeat mode
RETURN Return RETURN
Display only the selected still picture image
Return
• The default password is “0000”.
• If the password is wrong, “Lock Code is incorrect” is displayed. Input the correct password.
• While listening to the channel being played, you can also set parental lock (vpage 32).
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 67
Remote control operation buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
67
2010/08/23 18:33:10
ENGLISH
Input Setup
Setting items
Edit Lock Code
Change the password.
SIRIUS
DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
Setting details
1. Press ui to select “Edit Lock Code”, and then press p or ENTER .
2. Input current lock code (4 digits) using uio p , and press ENTER .
3. Input new lock code (4 digits) using uio p , and press ENTER .
4. Input new lock code (4 digits) again using uio p , and press ENTER .
5. Press ui to select “Execute”, and then press ENTER .
If the correct password is input, “Completed” is displayed, and the new password is modified.
• If the old password is incorrectly input, “Current Lock Code is incorrect” is displayed, and proceed again from step 1.
• If the password input is 3 digits or less, “Enter 4 digits number” is displayed, and input again with a 4 digit password.
• If the new password is not correctly input, “New Lock Codes do not
Match” is displayed and the password does not change.
Antenna Aiming
Install the antenna with radio reception sensitivity set to maximum.
Setting items
Satellite
Indicate satellite signal strength.
SIRIUS
Terrestrial
Indicate terrestrial signal strength.
¡¡¡
¡¡
¡
Display
Setting details
Condition
Signal strength is excellent
Signal strength is good
Signal strength is weak
No signal
SIRIUS
NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Input Assign
Examples of input assign menu screen displays
q
INPUT SETUP
INPUT ASSIGN
Default [ HDMI ]
BD
DVD
VCR
SAT
GAME
AUX1
TV
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI4
HDMI3
HDMI5
HDMI6
None
[ DIGITAL ]
None
Coax1
None
Coax2
None
Opt3
Opt1
[ COMP ]
1-RCA
2-RCA
4-RCA
3-RCA
None
None
None
Select w ENTER Enter e RETURN
Change HDMI input connector assignment r q Input Source w HDMI input e Digital audio input r Component video input
Input assignments menu operations
1 Use uio p to move the highlight to the item you want to set.
2 Press ENTER assigned.
, then use o p to select the input connector to be
3 Press ENTER to register the setting.
NOTE
If all “HDMI”, “Digital” and “Component” assignment of the Game source are set to “None”, Game source cannot be selected with the input source selection.
Preset Name
Assign name to a preset memory.
Setting items
A1 – G8
Select the preset channel.
HD Radio
Default
The changed preset name is returned to the default setting.
Setting details
• Up to eight characters can be input.
• For character input, see page 65.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
68
Remote control operation buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 68 2010/08/23 18:33:10
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
Setting items
HDMI
Set this to change the HDMI input connectors assigned to the input sources.
BD DVD VCR
SAT GAME AUX1
TV
HDMI 1 / HDMI 2 / HDMI 3 / HDMI 4 / HDMI 5 / HDMI 6
None : Do not assign an HDMI input connector to the selected input source.
Setting details
• At time of purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as shown below.
Input source
BD DVD VCR SAT GAME AUX1 TV
Default setting
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 4
HDMI
3
HDMI
5
HDMI
6
None
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Input Setup
Setting items
Component
Set this to change the component video input connectors assigned to the input sources.
BD DVD VCR
SAT GAME AUX1
TV
Setting details
1-RCA / 2-RCA / 3-RCA / 4-RCA (Component video)
None : Do not assign a component video input connector to the selected input source.
• At time of purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as shown below.
Input source
Default setting
BD
1-RCA
DVD
2-RCA
VCR
4-RCA
SAT
3-RCA
GAME
None
AUX1
None
TV
None
Digital
Set this to change the digital input connectors assigned to the input sources.
• An input source to which an HDMI input connector cannot be assigned is displayed as “– – –”.
• To play the video signal assigned at “HDMI” combined with the audio signal assigned at “Input Assign“ – “Digital”, select “Digital” at “Input
Mode” (vpage 71).
• The audio signals input from the analog and digital connectors are not output to the monitor.
• When “HDMI Control” (vpage 80) is set to “ON”, HDMI input connector cannot be assigned to “TV”.
Coax1 – 2 (COAXIAL) / Opt1 – 3 (OPTICAL)
None : Do not assign a digital input connector to the selected input source.
• At time of purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as shown below.
BD DVD VCR
SAT GAME AUX1
TV
CD CDR
SIRIUS
Input source
Default setting
BD
None
DVD
Coax
1
VCR
None
SAT
Coax
2
GAME
None
AUX1
Opt
3
Input source TV
Default setting
Opt
1
CD CDR SIRIUS
Opt
2
None None
Default
The “Input Assign” settings are returned to the default settings.
An input source to which an component video input connector cannot be assigned is displayed as “– – –”.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
If you select “Default” and press ENTER , the message “Default
Setting?” is displayed. Select “Yes” or “No”, and then press ENTER .
Video
Default settings are underlined.
Set the source video.
z “GAME” or “TV” can be set when “HDMI” (vpage 69) or “Component” (vpage 69) has been assigned.
Setting items
Video Select
Video of another input source is played back combined with the playing audio.
Setting details
Source : Play the picture and sound of the input source.
BD / DVD / VCR / SAT / GAME / AUX1 / TV : Select video input source to view. This can be set for individual input sources.
“GAME” and “TV” can be selected only when a component video is assigned as an input source.
NOTE
• It is not possible to select HDMI input signals.
• Input sources for which “Delete” is selected at “Source Delete” (vpage 84) cannot be selected.
• This can also be set by pressing remote control unit.
V.SEL
on the
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 69
Remote control operation buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
69
2010/08/23 18:33:11
ENGLISH DEUTSCH
Input Setup
Setting items
Video Mode
Make settings for video processing.
BD DVD VCR
SAT GAME z
AUX1 TV z
FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
Setting details
Auto : Process video automatically based on the HDMI content information.
Movie : Process video normally.
Game : Always process video appropriate for game content.
• If “Video Mode” is set to “Auto”, the mode is switched according to the input contents.
• If a source is played in both MAIN ZONE (audio and video) and ZONE2
(audio only) modes in the same room, audio in MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 modes may sound out of synchronization, but this is not malfunction. In this case, setting to “Game” mode may improve audio synchronization.
ON : The input video signal is converted.
OFF : The input video signal is not converted.
Video Convert
The input video signal is converted automatically in conjunction with the connected TV (vpage 14
“Converting input video signals for output (Video conversion function)”).
BD DVD VCR
SAT GAME z
AUX1 TV z i/p Scaler
Convert the input source’s resolution to the resolution set at “Resolution”.
BD DVD VCR
SAT GAME z
AUX1 NET/USB
TV z
• When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion function might not operate. In this case set “Video Convert” to “OFF”.
• When “Video Convert” is set to “OFF”, the video conversion function does not work. In this case, connect this unit and TV with the same type of cable.
Analog : Use i/p scaler function for analog video signal.
Analog & HDMI : Use i/p scaler function for analog and HDMI video signal.
HDMI : Use i/p scaler function for HDMI video signal.
OFF : Do not use i/p scaler function.
• “Analog & HDMI” and “HDMI” can be set for input sources for which an
HDMI input connector is assigned.
• Which items can be set depend on the input source assigned to each input connector.
• This function is not effective when the input signal is x.v.Color, 3D, sYCC 601 color, Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC 601 color or computer resolution.
NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Setting items
Resolution
Set the output resolution.
Resolution (Analog) :
Analog Video
Resolution (HDMI) : HDMI
Setting details
Auto : The number of pixels the TV connected to the HDMI output connector supports is detected automatically and the appropriate output resolution is set.
480p / 576p / 1080i / 720p / 1080p / 1080p:24Hz : Set the output resolution.
BD DVD VCR
SAT GAME z
AUX1 NET/USB
TV z
Progressive Mode
Set an appropriate progressive conversion mode for the source video signal.
• This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than
“OFF”.
• When “i/p Scaler” is set to ”Analog & HDMI”, the resolution of both the analog video input signal and HDMI input signal can be set.
• To watch 1080p/24Hz pictures, use a TV that supports 1080p/24Hz video signals.
• When set to “1080p/24Hz”, you can enjoy film-like pictures for film sources (in 24 Hz). For video sources and mixed sources, we recommend setting the resolution to “1080p”.
• It is not possible to convert a 50 Hz signal into 1080p/24Hz. It is output at a resolution of 1080p/50Hz.
Auto : The video signal is automatically detected and the appropriate mode is set.
Video1 : Select mode suitable for video playback
Video2 : Select mode suitable for video and 30-frame film material playback.
BD DVD VCR
SAT GAME z
AUX1 TV z
Aspect
Set the aspect ratio for the video signals output to the
HDMI.
This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than
“OFF”.
Full : Output at 16:9 aspect ratio.
Normal : Output at 4:3 aspect ratio.
“Aspect” can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than
“OFF”.
BD DVD VCR
SAT GAME z
AUX1 NET/USB
TV z z “GAME” or “TV” can be set when “HDMI” (vpage 69) or “Component” (vpage 69) has been assigned.
70
Remote control operation buttons
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 70
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
2010/08/23 18:33:11
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Input Setup
Input Mode
Default settings are underlined.
The input modes available for selection may vary depending on the input source.
Setting items
Input Mode
Set the audio input modes for the different input sources.
Setting details
Auto : Automatically detect input signal and perform playback.
HDMI : Play only signals from HDMI input.
Digital : Play only signals from digital input.
Analog : Play only signals from analog input.
7.1CH IN : Only signals input from the 7.1CH INPUT terminal will be played back.
Rename
Change the display name of the selected input source.
Setting items
Rename
Change the display name of the selected input source.
Default
The input source name is returned to the default setting.
Setting details
• Up to eight characters can be input.
• For character input, see page 65.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
Decode Mode
Set the decode mode for input source.
BD DVD VCR
SAT GAME AUX1
TV
CD CDR
• This can also be set by pressing A/D on the remote control unit.
• Each time A/D is pressed, the setting is changed as shown below.
Auto HDMI Digital Analog
7.1CH IN
• “HDMI” can be set for input sources for which “HDMI” is assigned at
“Input Assign” (vpage 69).
• “Digital” can be set for input sources for which “Digital” is assigned at
“Input Assign” (vpage 69).
• If the input source is set to “TV” or “Game”, it cannot be set to “Analog”.
• When digital signals are properly input, the indicator lights on the display. If the indicator does not light, check the digital input connector assignment and the connections.
• The surround mode cannot be set if the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.
• If “HDMI Control” is set to “ON” and a TV compatible with the ARC is connected via the HDMI OUT connectors, the input mode whose input source is “TV” is fixed to ARC.
Auto : Detect type of digital input signal and decode and play automatically.
PCM : Decode and play only PCM input signals.
DTS : Decode and play only DTS input signals.
• This item can be set for input sources for which “HDMI” or “Digital” is assigned at “Input Assign” (vpage 68).
• Normally set this mode to “Auto”. Set “PCM” and “DTS” when inputting the corresponding input signal.
Source Level
• This function corrects the playback level of the selected input source’s audio input.
• Make this setting if there are differences in the input volume levels between the different sources.
Setting details
–12dB – +12dB (0dB)
The analog input level and digital input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which “HDMI” or “Digital” is assigned at “Input Assign“ (vpage 68).
Playback Mode
Default settings are underlined.
Make settings for repeat playback mode or random playback mode.
Setting items
Repeat
Make settings for repeat mode.
Setting details
All : All files are played repeatedly.
One : A file being played is played repeatedly.
OFF : Repeat playback mode is canceled.
NET/USB
Random
Make random mode settings.
NET/USB
ON : Enable random playback.
OFF : Disable random playback.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 71
Remote control operation buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
71
2010/08/23 18:33:11
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
Input Setup
Still Picture
Default settings are underlined.
Make settings for playing back still picture images.
Setting items
Slide Show
Make slide show settings.
Setting details
ON : Display still picture images in a slide show.
OFF : Display only the selected still picture image.
NET/USB
Interval
Set the playback time per image.
NET/USB
5sec – 60sec
NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Audio/Video Adjust
The sound being played in the surround mode can be adjusted to your liking.
The items (parameters) that can be adjusted depend on the signal being input and the currently set surround mode. For details on the adjustable parameters, see “Surround modes and parameters”
(vpage 104).
Menu operation
1 Press mode.
AMP to set the remote control unit to amplifier operation
2 Press MENU .
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3 Use ui to select the menu to be set or operated.
4 Press ENTER or p to enter the setting.
• To return to the previous item, press RETURN .
• Exiting the Menu, press MENU while the menu is displayed.
The menu display disappears.
Items that can be set with the Audio/Video Adjust procedure
Audio Adjust (vpage 73) n Surround Parameter (vpage 73) n Tone (vpage 73) n Audyssey Settings (vpage 74) n A-DSX Soundstage (vpage 75) n Manual EQ (vpage 76) n M-DAX (vpage 76) n Audio Delay (vpage 76)
Picture Adjust (vpage 77)
72
Remote control operation buttons
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 72
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
2010/08/23 18:33:11
Audio Adjust
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS n
Surround Parameter
Default settings are underlined.
Adjust surround sound parameters. It may not be possible to set this item depending on the input signal.
Setting details Setting items
HT-EQ
Soften the treble range of movie soundtracks for better understanding.
DRC
Compress dynamic range
(difference between loud and soft sounds).
D.Comp
Compress dynamic range
(difference between loud and soft sounds).
LFE
Adjust the low-frequency effects level (LFE).
ON : “HT-EQ” is used.
OFF : “HT-EQ” is not used.
Auto : Automatic dynamic range compression on/off control according to source. This can be set in the Dolby TrueHD mode.
Low / Mid / High : These set the compression level.
OFF : Dynamic range compression always off.
Low / Mid / High : These set the compression level.
OFF : Turn dynamic range compression off.
–10dB – 0dB
For proper playback of the different sources, we recommend setting to the values below.
• Dolby Digital sources : “0dB”
• DTS movie sources : “0dB”
• DTS music sources : “–10dB”
0.0 – 1.0 (0.3) C.Image
Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider sound.
Panorama
Assign front L/R signal also to surround channels for wider sound.
Dimension
Shift sound image center to front or rear to adjust playback balance.
C.Width
Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider sound.
ON : Set.
OFF : Do not set.
0 – 6 (3)
0 – 7 (3)
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Audio/Video Adjust
Setting items
Height Gain
Control the front height channel volume.
Setting details
Low : Reduce the front height channel volume.
Mid : Front height channel sound is output with standard sound volume.
High : Increase the front height channel volume.
Default
The “Surround Parameter” settings are returned to the default settings.
NOTE
“Height Gain” is displayed for the following settings.
• When “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) is set to “Normal”.
• When the “Speaker Config.” – “F.Height” setting (vpage 78) is set other than to “None”.
• When surround mode is “PLgz” or the PLgz decoder is used.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
n
Tone
Adjust the tonal quality of the sound.
Setting items Setting details
Tone Control
Set the tone control function to ON and OFF.
ON : Allow tone adjustment (bass, treble).
OFF : Playback without tone adjustment.
“Tone Control” can be set when “Dynamic EQ” (vpage 74) is set to
“OFF”.
NOTE
• “Tone Control” settings are not reflected to ZONE2 and ZONE3.
• The tone cannot be adjusted in the direct mode.
–6dB – +6dB Bass
Adjust low frequency range
(bass).
Treble
Adjust high frequency range
(treble).
“Bass” can be set when “Tone Control” is set to “ON”.
–6dB – +6dB
“Treble” can be set when “Tone Control” is set to “ON”.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 73
Remote control operation buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
73
2010/08/23 18:33:12
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
Audio/Video Adjust n
Audyssey Settings
Default settings are underlined.
Set MultEQ® XT, Dynamic EQ® and Dynamic Volume®. These can be selected after Audyssey® Auto
Setup has been performed. For additional information on Audyssey technology, please see page 109.
NOTE
If you have not performed Auto Setup, or if you change the speaker settings after performing Auto Setup, you may not be able to select Dynamic EQ/Dynamic Volume, and “Run Audyssey” may be displayed.
In this case, either perform Audyssey Auto Setup over again or perform “Restore” (vpage 12) to return to the settings after Audyssey Auto Setup was run.
Setting items
MultEQ XT
Select one equalizer from three modes. MultEQ XT corrects both time and frequency response problems in the listening area based on Audyssey
Auto Setup calibration. We recommend “Audyssey”.
MultEQ XT is the prerequisite function for
Dynamic EQ and Dynamic
Volume.
Setting details
Audyssey : Optimize the frequency response of all speakers.
Audyssey Byp.L/R : Optimize frequency response of speakers except front L and R speakers.
Audyssey Flat : Optimize frequency response of all speakers to flat response.
Manual : Apply frequency response set with “Manual EQ” (vpage 76).
OFF : Turn “MultEQ XT” equalizer off.
• “Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” and “Audyssey Flat” can be selected after Audyssey Auto Setup has been performed. “Audyssey” is automatically selected after performing Audyssey Auto Setup. When
“Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” or “Audyssey Flat” is selected, illuminates.
• After running Audyssey Auto Setup, if the
Speaker Configuration, Distance, Channel
Level, and Crossover Frequency have changed without increasing the number of speakers measured, only
• Pressing
illuminates.
MULTEQ makes this setting.
NOTE
• “MultEQ XT” and “Manual” cannot be selected when “EQ Customize” is set to “Not Used” (vpage 81).
• When using headphones, “MultEQ XT” is automatically set to “OFF”.
NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Setting items
Dynamic EQ®
Solve the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics. Works with
MultEQ XT.
Setting details
ON : Use Dynamic EQ.
OFF : Do not use Dynamic EQ.
• is displayed when set to “ON”.
• Buttons on the remote control unit or main unit can be used for operations.
Press DYN EQ/VOL .
Each time DYN EQ/VOL is pressed, the setting is changed as shown below.
Reference Level Offset
Audyssey Dynamic EQ is referenced to the standard film mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the reference response and surround envelopment when the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However, film reference level is not always used in music or other non-film content.
Dynamic EQ Reference
Level Offset provides three offsets from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and
15 dB) that can be selected when the mix level of the content is not within the standard.
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : Heavy
Dynamic EQ : OFF
Dynamic Volume : OFF
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : Medium
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : OFF
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : Light
0dB (Film Ref) : This is the default setting and should be used when listening to movies.
5dB : Select this setting for content that has a very wide dynamic range, such as classical music.
10dB : Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a wider dynamic range. This setting should also be selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at 10 dB below film reference.
15dB : Select this setting for pop/rock music or other program material that is mixed at very high listening levels and has a compressed dynamic range.
Setting is enabled when “Dynamic EQ” is “ON” (vpage 74).
74
Remote control operation buttons
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 74
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
2010/08/23 18:33:12
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
Setting items
Dynamic Volume®
Solve the problem of large variations in volume level between TV, movies and other content (between quiet passages and loud passages, etc.) by automatically adjusting to the user’s preferred volume setting.
Setting details
Heavy : Most adjustment to softest and loudest sounds.
Medium : Medium adjustment to loudest and softest sound.
Light : Least adjustment to loudest and softest sounds.
OFF : Do not use “Dynamic Volume”.
• is displayed when set to “ON”.
• If “Dynamic Volume” is set to “Yes” in Auto
Setup (vpage 11), the setting is automatically changed to “Heavy”.
• Buttons on the remote control unit or main unit can be used for operations.
Press DYN EQ/VOL .
Each time DYN EQ/VOL is pressed, the setting is changed as shown below.
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : Heavy
Dynamic EQ : OFF
Dynamic Volume : OFF
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : Medium
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : OFF
Dynamic EQ : ON
Dynamic Volume : Light n
A-DSX Soundstage
Adjust Audyssey DSX™ setting and sound stage parameters.
Setting items
Audyssey DSX
Provides more immersive surround sound by adding the new channels.
Default settings are underlined.
Setting details
ON-Height- : Turn on A-DSX processing for height expansion.
ON-Wide- : Turn on A-DSX processing for wide expansion.
OFF : Do not set Audyssey DSX.
• This can also be set by pressing A-DSX .
• The indicator illuminates on the display.
ESPAÑOL
Setting items
Stage Width
Adjust sound stage width when using front wide speakers.
Stage Height
Adjust sound stage height when using front height speakers.
ITALIANO
–10 – +10 (0)
FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Audio/Video Adjust
Setting details
–10 – +10 (0)
• “Audyssey DSX” can be set when you are using front height speakers or front wide speakers.
• “Audyssey DSX” is only valid when using a center speaker.
• “Audyssey DSX” is only enabled when the listening mode is set other than STEREO, PLgz Height, MULTI CH STEREO, NEURAL, DOLBY VS,
DIRECT, PURE DIRECT.
• “A-DSX Soundstage” cannot be configured if the HD Audio source being played includes Front height and Front wide channels. In this case, the respective channels are played back using the input signals.
About Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion (A-DSX)
Audyssey DSX is a scalable surround expansion system that adds new channels to improve the surround impression. Based on research in human hearing Audyssey DSX adds a pair of Wide channels in the front because that information is critical in the rendering of a realistic soundstage.
Audyssey DSX then adds a pair of Height channels above the main front channels to reproduce the next most important acoustical and perceptual cues related to soundstage depth. In addition to creating these new channels, Audyssey DSX applies Surround Envelopment
Processing to enhance the blend between the front and side/back surround channels. The result is a much more seamless and enveloping home theater experience.
OFF
Audyssey DSX : ON -Height-
Audyssey DSX : ON -Wide-
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 75
Remote control operation buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
75
2010/08/23 18:33:12
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
Audio/Video Adjust n
Manual EQ
Default settings are underlined.
Use the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.
“Manual EQ” can be set when “MultEQ XT” setting (vpage 74) is “Manual”
Setting items
Adjust CH
Correct the tone of each speaker.
Setting details q Select the speaker tone adjustment method.
All : Adjust the tone of all speakers together.
L/R : Adjust the tone of left and right speakers together.
Each : Adjust the tone of each speaker.
w Select the speaker.
e Select the adjustment frequency band.
63Hz / 125Hz / 250Hz / 500Hz / 1kHz / 2kHz / 4kHz / 8kHz / 16kHz
• Select the speakers you want to adjust when “L/R” or “Each” is selected.
r Adjust the level.
–20.0dB – +6.0dB (0.0dB)
Yes : Copy.
No : Do not copy.
Base Curve Copy
Copy “Audyssey Flat” curve from MultEQ® XT.
Default
The “Manual EQ” settings are returned to the default settings.
“Base Curve Copy” is displayed after Audyssey® Auto Setup has been performed.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
NEDERLANDS SVENSKA n
M-DAX
Default settings are underlined.
Compressed audio formats such as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio) and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The M-DAX function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression. It also corrects the sense of volume of the bass to obtain richer sound with compressed audio signals.
Setting details
OFF : Do not use M-DAX.
LOW : Optimized mode for compressed sources with normal highs.
MID : Apply suitable bass and treble boost for all compressed sources.
HIGH : Optimized mode for compressed sources with very weak highs.
• This item can be set with analog signals or when a PCM signal (fs = 44.1/48 kHz) is input.
• This cannot be set when the surround mode is set to “DIRECT” or “PURE
DIRECT”.
• This item default setting is “OFF”.
• If a setting other than “OFF” is selected, the M-DAX indicator lights.
• Pressing M-DAX on the remote control unit or the main unit makes this setting.
OFF LOW MID
HIGH n
Audio Delay
While viewing video, manually adjust the time to delay audio output.
Default settings are underlined.
Setting details
0ms – 200ms
• This item can be set within the range of 0 to 100 ms when “Auto Lip Sync” is set to “ON” and when a TV compatible with Auto Lip Sync is connected.
• Store “Audio Delay” for each input source.
• Audio Delay for game mode can be set when “Video Mode” (vpage 70) is set to “Auto” or “Game”.
• This can also be set by pressing A.DELAY
on the remote control unit.
76
Remote control operation buttons
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 76
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
2010/08/23 18:33:13
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
Audio/Video Adjust
Picture Adjust
Default settings are underlined.
• This item can be set when the input source is BD DVD VCR SAT GAME AUX1 NET/USB TV .
• With input sources other than the ones above, this item can be set when “Video Select” is selected. In this case, the original input source settings are called out.
• Can be set when the “Video Convert” setting (vpage 70) is “ON”.
• “GAME” or “TV” can be set when “HDMI” (vpage 69) or “Component” (vpage 69) has been assigned.
Setting details Setting items
Contrast
Adjust picture contrast.
Brightness
Adjust picture brightness.
Chroma Level
Adjust picture chroma level
(saturation).
Hue
Adjust color hue.
DNR
Reduce overall picture noise.
Enhancer
Emphasize picture contours.
–6 – +6 (0)
0 – +12
–6 – +6 (0)
–6 – +6 (0)
OFF / Low / Mid / High
0 – +12
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Manual Setup
Set when changing Audyssey® Auto Setup settings, or when changing the audio, video, display or other settings.
• If you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey Auto Setup, it will not be possible
to set MultEQ® XT, Dynamic EQ® and Dynamic Volume® (vpage 74, 75).
• Can be used without changing the settings. Please set if necessary.
Menu operation
1 Press mode.
AMP to set the remote control unit to amplifier operation
2 Press MENU .
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3 Press ui to select the menu to be set or operated.
4 Press ENTER or p to enter the setting.
• To return to the previous item, press RETURN .
• Exiting the Menu, press MENU while the menu is displayed.
The menu display disappears.
• “DNR” and “Enhancer” are each effective with HDMI output.
• The value set at “Picture Adjust” is stored in the memory individually for each input source.
Items that can be set with the Manual Setup procedure
Speaker Setup (vpage 78) HDMI Setup (vpage 80)
MANUAL SETUP
SPEAKER SETUP
MANUAL SETUP
HDMI SETUP
Audio Setup (vpage 81)
MANUAL SETUP
AUDIO SETUP
Amp Assign
Speaker Config.
Bass Setting
Distance
Channel Level
Crossover Frequency
RGB Range
Auto Lip Sync
HDMI Audio Out
Monitor Out
HDMI Control
Standby Source
Power Off Control
Normal
ON
AMP
Monitor 1
ON
Last
All
7.1ch IN SW Level
EQ Customize
Assign surround back AMP for other use
Network Setup (vpage 81)
MANUAL SETUP
NETWORK SETUP
Network Connecting
Other
Rhapsody Account
Napster Account
Network Information
Make settings for wired LAN
RETURN
Use video range from 16 (black) to 235 (white)
Return
Zone Setup (vpage 83)
MANUAL SETUP
ZONE SETUP
ZONE2 Setup
ZONE3 Setup
Set subwoofer playback level in 7.1ch IN mode
Option Setup (vpage 84)
MANUAL SETUP
OPTION SETUP
Volume Control
Source Delete
GUI
Component 2 Output
Zone Rename
Trigger Out
Display
Setup Lock
Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE2 Make settings for volume control
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 77
Remote control operation buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
77
2010/08/23 18:33:13
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
Manual Setup
Speaker Setup
Default settings are underlined.
Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings made in Audyssey Auto Setup.
• If you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey Auto Setup, it will not be possible to select
MultEQ XT, Dynamic EQ and Dynamic Volume (vpage 74, 75).
• Manual Setup can be used without changing the settings. Please set if necessary.
n
Audio output from each PRE OUT terminal
PRE OUT Channel
UNBALANCED PRE
OUT terminal
BALANCED PRE
OUT terminal
FL/FR
FL/FR
C
C
SW1/SW2 SL/SR
SW1/SW2 SL/SR
SBL/SBR
SBL/SBR
Audio Output
Surround
Back *
HL/HR
---
Front Height /
Front B
WL/WR
---
Front Wide
*The output audio differs depending on the “Amp Assign” settings.
Setting items
Amp Assign
Set the speakers connected to the UNBALANCED and
BALANCED PRE OUT SBL/
SBR terminals of the power amp.
Speaker Config.
Select speaker configuration and size (bass reproduction capability).
Setting details
Normal : Set when using surround back, front height or front wide speakers.
ZONE2 : Set for connecting the speakers for ZONE2.
ZONE3 : Set for connecting the speakers for ZONE3.
SPKR-C : Set for connecting the tweeter of the front speaker to the
UNBALANCED and BALANCED PRE OUT SBL/SBR terminals of the power amp, and the woofer of the front speaker to the FL/FR terminals.
Front : Set the front speaker size.
• Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low frequencies.
• Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies.
NOTE
Do not use the outward shape of the speaker to determine selection of a
“Large” or “Small” speaker.
Instead, use the frequencies set in “Crossover
Frequency” (vpage 80) as the standard for determining bass reproduction capability.
• When “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to
“Large”.
• When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Center”, “Surround“, “S.Back”,
“F.Height” and “F.Wide” can not be set to “Large”.
Center : Set the presence and size of the center speaker.
• Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low frequencies.
• Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies.
• None : Select when a center speaker is not connected.
“Large” is not displayed when “Front” is set to “Small”.
Subwoofer : Set the presence of a subwoofer.
• Yes : Use a subwoofer.
• No : Select when a subwoofer is not connected.
When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is automatically set to “Yes”.
NEDERLANDS
Setting items
Speaker Config.
(Continued)
SVENSKA
Setting details
Surround : Set the presence and size of the surround speakers.
• Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low frequencies.
• Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies.
• None : Select when the surround speakers are not connected.
• When “Surround” is set to “Large”, “S.Back”, “F.Height” and “F.Wide” can be set to “Large”.
• When “Surround” is set to “None”, “S.Back”, “F.Height” and “F.Wide” can automatically set to “None”.
S.Back : Set the presence, size and number of surround back speakers.
• Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low frequencies.
• Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies.
• None : Select when the surround back speakers are not connected.
• 2spkrs : Use two surround back speakers.
• 1spkr : Use only one surround back speaker. When you select this setting, connect the surround back speaker to the left (L) channel.
Even when the “S.Back“ setting is other than “None”, sound may not be emitted from the surround back speaker, depending on the playback source.
NOTE
When “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 78) is other than “Normal”, you cannot make the “S.Back” setting.
F.Height : Set the presence and size of the front height speakers.
• Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low frequencies.
• Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies.
• None : Select when the front height speakers are not connected.
NOTE
When “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 78) is other than “Normal”, you cannot make the “F.Height” setting.
78
Remote control operation buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 78 2010/08/23 18:33:13
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
Setting items
Speaker Config.
(Continued)
Bass Setting
Set subwoofer and LFE signal range playback.
Setting details
F.Wide : Set the presence and size of the front wide speakers.
• Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low frequencies.
• Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies.
• None : Select when the front wide speakers are not connected.
NOTE
When “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 78) is other than “Normal”, you cannot make the “F.Wide” setting.
Subwoofer Mode : Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.
• LFE : The low range signal of the channel set to “Small” speaker size is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.
• LFE+Main : The low range signal of all channels is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.
Distance
Set distance from listening position to speakers.
Measure beforehand the distance from the listening position to each speaker.
• “Subwoofer Mode” can be set when “Speaker Config.” – “Subwoofer”
(vpage 78) is set to “Yes”.
• Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass.
• Select “LFE+Main” if you want the bass signals to always be produced from the subwoofer.
NOTE
If “Front” and “Center” for “Speaker Config.” are set to “Large”, and
“Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE”, no sound may be output from the subwoofers, depending on the input signal or selected surround mode.
LPF for LFE : Set LFE signal playback range.
• 80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz / 250Hz
Unit : Set the unit of distance.
• Feet / Meters
Step : Set the minimum variable width of the distance.
• 1ft / 0.1ft
• 0.1m / 0.01m
Front L / Front R / Center / Subwoofer / Surround L / Surround R /
S.Back L z / S.Back R z / F.Height L / F.Height R / F.Wide L / F.Wide R
: Select the speaker.
z When the “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” setting (vpage 78) is set to
“1spkr”, “S.Back” is displayed.
• 0.0ft – 60.0ft / 0.00m – 18.00m : Set the distance.
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Manual Setup
Setting items
Distance
(Continued)
Setting details
• The speakers that can be selected differ depending on the “Amp Assign”
(vpage 78) and “Speaker Config.” (vpage 78) settings.
• Default settings :
Front L / Front R / Center / Subwoofer / F.Height L / F.Height R / F.Wide L /
F.Wide R : 12.0 ft (3.6 m)
Surround L / Surround R / S.Back L / S.Back R : 10.0 ft (3.0 m)
• Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 20 ft (6.0 m).
NOTE
Speakers set to “None” in “Speaker Config.” (vpage 78) are not displayed.
Default : The “Distance” settings are returned to the default settings.
• Yes : Reset to the defaults.
• No : Do not reset to the defaults.
Channel Level
Set the volume of the test tone to be the same when it is output from each speaker.
When you select “Default” and press ENTER , the “Default Setting?” prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or “No”, and press ENTER .
Test Tone Start : Output test tone.
• Front L / F.Height L / Center / F.Height R / Front R / F.Wide R /
Surround R / S.Back R z / S.Back L z / Surround L / F.Wide L /
Subwoofer : Select the speaker.
z When the “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” setting (vpage 78) is set to
“1spkr”, “S.Back” is displayed.
• –12.0dB – +12.0dB (0.0dB) : Adjust the volume.
• When o is pressed while the subwoofer volume is set to “–12 dB”, the
“Subwoofer” setting switches to “OFF”.
• When “Channel Level” is adjusted, the adjusted values are set for all the surround modes. To adjust the channel level separately for the different surround modes, use the operation see page 56.
• When you press TEST TONE on the remote control unit, you can enter this setting item immediately.
NOTE
• Speakers set to “None” in the “Speaker Config.” (vpage 78) settings are not displayed.
• When a headphones jack is inserted in the PHONES jack of this unit, the
“Channel Level” is not displayed.
Default : The “Channel Level” settings are returned to the default settings.
• Yes : Reset to the defaults.
• No : Do not reset to the defaults.
When you select “Default” and press ENTER , the “Default Setting?” prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or “No”, and press ENTER .
Remote control operation buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
79
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 79 2010/08/23 18:33:14
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
Manual Setup
Setting items
Crossover Frequency
Set the maximum frequency of the bass signal output from each channel to the subwoofer. Set the
Crossover Frequency to suit the bass reproduction capability of the speaker being used.
Setting details
Crossover : Set the crossover frequency.
• 40Hz / 60Hz / 80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz /
250Hz
Advanced : Specify crossover frequency for each speaker.
• Front / Center / Surround / S.Back / F.Height / F.Wide : Select the speaker.
• 40Hz / 60Hz / 80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz /
250Hz : Set the crossover frequency.
• “Crossover Frequency” can be set when the “Bass Setting” –
“Subwoofer Mode” (vpage 79) setting is “LFE+Main”, or when you have a speaker that is set to “Small”.
• Always set the crossover frequency to “80Hz”. When using small speakers, however, we recommend setting the crossover frequency to a higher frequency.
• For speakers set to “Small”, sound below the crossover frequency is cut from the sound output. The cut bass sound is output from the subwoofer or front speakers.
• The speakers that can be set when “Advanced” is selected differ depending on to the “Subwoofer Mode” setting (vpage 79).
• When “LFE” is selected, speakers set to “Small” at “Speaker Config.” can be set. If the speakers are set to “Large”, “Full Band” is displayed and the setting cannot be made.
• If set to “LFE+Main”, this setting can be made regardless of the speaker size.
NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
HDMI Setup
Default settings are underlined.
Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.
Setting items
RGB Range
Set the video range of RGB output from the HDMI connector.
Auto Lip Sync
Make automatic compensation for timing shift in audio and video output.
HDMI Audio Out
Select HDMI audio output device.
Setting details
Normal : Output with RGB video range (16 (black) to 235 (white)).
Enhanced : Output with RGB video range (0 (black) to 255 (white)).
This setting is active when using a TV equipped with a DVI terminal.
ON : Compensated.
OFF : Not compensated.
AMP : Play back through speakers connected to this unit.
TV : Play back through TV connected to this unit.
Monitor Out
Make settings for HDMI monitor output.
When the HDMI control function is activated, priority is given to the TV audio setting (vpage 55 “HDMI control function”).
Monitor 1 : A TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal is always used.
Monitor 2 : A TV connected to the HDMI OUT 2 terminal is always used.
HDMI Control
You can link operations with devices connected to HDMI and compatible with HDMI
Control.
With “Resolution” (vpage 70) not set to “Auto”, check whether the TV you are using is compatible with the resolution under “HDMI
Information” – “HDMI Monitor 1 Information” and “HDMI Monitor 2
Information” (vpage 88).
ON : Use HDMI control function.
OFF : Do not use HDMI control function.
• When a device that is not compatible with the HDMI control function is connected, set “HDMI Control” to “OFF”.
• Please consult the operating instructions for each connected component to check the settings.
• Refer to “HDMI control function” (vpage 55) for more information about the HDMI control function.
NOTE
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “ON”, it consumes more standby
power. If you are not using this unit for an extended period, it is recommended that you unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
• “HDMI Control” does not work when the power to the equipment is off.
Either turn power on or set to standby.
• The HDMI control function controls operations of a TV that is compatible with the HDMI control function. Make sure that the TV and HDMI are connected when you perform HDMI control.
• If the “HDMI Control” settings have been changed, always reset the power to connected devices after the change.
80
Remote control operation buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 80 2010/08/23 18:33:14
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Manual Setup
Default settings are underlined.
Setting items
Standby Source
Sets the HDMI input source to put into standby when the power is on.
Setting details
Last : This item is set at the last-used input source.
HDMI1 / HDMI2 / HDMI3 / HDMI4 / HDMI5 / HDMI6 : Put the respective input source into standby.
Power Off Control
Links the power standby of this unit to external equipment.
“Standby Source” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “ON”.
All : If power to a connected TV is turned off independently of the input source, power to this unit is automatically set to standby.
Video : If power to a connected TV is turned off when the input source is BD / DVD / VCR / SAT / GAME / AUX1 / TV, power to this unit is automatically set to standby.
OFF : This unit does not link with power to a TV.
“Power Off Control” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “ON”.
Network Setup
Make network settings.
Setting items
Network Connecting
Make settings for wired
LAN.
Audio Setup
Default settings are underlined.
Make settings for audio playback.
Setting items
7.1ch IN SW Level
Setup playback method for analog signals inputted from
7.1CH INPUT connectors.
EQ Customize
Set so that unused equalizer settings are not displayed when MULTEQ is pressed.
Setting details
Subwoofer Level : Set playback level of subwoofer signal input from the
7.1CH INPUT connector.
• +10dB : This is the recommended level.
• +15dB / +5dB / 0dB : Select the level according to the player being used.
Audyssey Byp. L/R : Set when not using “Audyssey Byp. L/R” equalizer.
• Used : Use.
• Not Used : Do not use.
Set so that “Audyssey Byp. L/R” settings can be made when
Audyssey® Auto Setup is performed.
Audyssey Flat : Set when not using “Audyssey Flat” equalizer.
• Used : Use.
• Not Used : Do not use.
Set so that “Audyssey Flat” settings can be made when Audyssey
Auto Setup is performed.
Manual : Set when not using the “Manual” equalizer.
• Used : Use.
• Not Used : Do not use.
Setting details
1. Connect the LAN cable (vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network
(LAN)”).
2. Turn on this unit (vpage 7 “Turn on power”).
This unit performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP function.
When connecting to a network that has no DHCP function, perform the setting in step 3.
3. Set the IP address at the “Network Connecting”.
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP
NETWORK CONNECTING
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP
NETWORK CONNECTING w
DHCP OFF
IP Address 192.168.100.19
Exit
Detail
ENTER Enter
Set IP address and proxy manually q
RETURN Return
DHCP OFF
IP Address [192.168.100.019]
Subnet Mask [255.255.255.000]
Default Gateway [000.000.000.000]
Primary DNS [000.000.000.000]
Secondary DNS [000.000.000.000]
Proxy
Exit r e
RETURN Return
Set IP address manually q On the menu, select “Network Connecting” – “Detail” and press
ENTER .
w Use o p to set “DHCP” to “OFF”, then press i .
The DHCP function is disabled.
e Use uip to input the address and press ENTER .
• IP Address : Set the IP address within the ranges shown below.
The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses are set.
CLASS A: 10.0.0.0 – 10.255.255.255
CLASS B: 172.16.0.0 – 172.31.255.255
CLASS C: 192.168.0.0 – 192.168.255.255
• Subnet Mask : When connecting an xDSL modem or terminal adapter directly to this unit, input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider. Normally input
255.255.255.0.
• Default Gateway : When connected to a gateway (router), input its
IP address.
• Primary DNS, Secondary DNS : If there is only one DNS address indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider, input it at
“Primary DNS”. If there are two or more DNS addresses, input the first one at “Secondary DNS”.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 81
Remote control operation buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
81
2010/08/23 18:33:14
ENGLISH
Manual Setup
Setting items
Network Connecting
(Continued)
DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
Setting details r Use i to select “Exit” and press ENTER .
Setup is complete.
• When connecting to the network via a Proxy server, select “Proxy” and press ENTER (vpage 82 “Proxy settings”).
• If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), there is no need to make the settings at “IP Address” and “Proxy”, since the DHCP function is set to “ON” in this unit’s default settings.
• If this unit is being used connected to a network without the DHCP function, the network settings must be made. In this case, some knowledge of networks is required. For details, consult a network administrator.
• If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and settings (vpage 24).
• If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP
(Internet Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased your computer.
• When you want to cancel the setting during IP address input, press
RETURN .
Proxy settings : Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a proxy server.
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP
NETWORK CONNECTING
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP
NETWORK CONNECTING
DHCP ON
IP Address 192.168.100.19
Exit
Detail
ENTER Enter
Set IP address and proxy manually q
RETURN Return
MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP
NETWORK CONNECTING e
DHCP ON
IP Address [192.168.100.019]
Subnet Mask [255.255.255.000]
Default gateway [000.000.000.000]
Primary DNS [000.000.000.000]
Secondary DNS [000.000.000.000]
Proxy w
Exit
ENTER
Set if using proxy server
Enter RETURN Return
Proxy ON r
Address [000.000.000.000] y t
Exit u
RETURN Return
Proxy server is used q On the menu, select “Network Connecting” – “Detail” and press
ENTER .
w Use ui to set “Proxy” and press ENTER .
e Use o p to set “Proxy” to “ON” and press i .
The proxy server is enabled.
NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Setting items
Network Connecting
(Continued)
Other
Network function on/off setting during standby, and
PC language setting.
Setting details r Use o p to select the proxy server input method, and then press i .
Address : Select when inputting by address.
Name : Select when inputting by domain name.
t Use uio p to input the proxy server address or domain name and press ENTER .
When “Address” is selected in step r : Input the address
When“Name” is selected in step r : Input the domain name
• For character input, see page 65.
y Use uio p to input the proxy server port number and press ENTER .
u Use i to select “Exit” and press ENTER .
Setup is complete.
Network Standby : Set the network function on/off during standby.
• ON : Network is on during standby. Main unit operable with a network compatible controller.
• OFF : Suspend network function during standby.
Set to “ON” when using the web control function.
PC Language : Select computer environment language.
• ara / chi (smpl) / chi (trad) / cze / dan / dut / eng / fin / fre / ger / gre /
heb / hun / ita / jpn / kor / nor / pol / por / por(BR) / rus / spa / swe / tur
Friendly Name Edit : The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed on the network. Up to 63 characters can be input. The default Friendly
Name on first use is “marantz:[AV7005]”.
• For character input, see page 65.
Default : Restores Friendly Name, which you had changed, to the default setting.
• Yes : Reset to the defaults.
• No : Do not reset to the defaults.
When you select “Default” and press ENTER , the “Default Setting?” prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or “No”, and press ENTER .
82
Remote control operation buttons
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 82
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
2010/08/23 18:33:15
Setting items
Other
(Continued)
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
Setting details
Update Notification : Displays a notification message on this unit’s menu screen when the latest firmware is released with “Firmware Update”. The notification message is displayed for about 20 seconds when the power is turned on. Connect to broadband Internet (vpage 24) when using this function.
• ON : Display update message.
• OFF : Do not display update message.
• When you press ENTER during display of the notification message, the “Check for Update” screen is displayed. (Refer to page 86 for more information on “Firmware Update”)
• Press RETURN to erase the notification message.
Upgrade Notification : Display a notification message on this unit’s menu screen when downloadable firmware is released with “Add New
Feature”. The notification message is displayed for about 20 seconds when the power is turned on. Connect to broadband Internet (vpage 24) when using this function.
• ON : Display upgrade message.
• OFF : Do not display upgrade message.
Rhapsody Account
Set or change Username and Password (vpage 42
“Listening to Rhapsody”).
Napster Account
Set or change Username and Password (vpage 39
“Listening to Napster”).
Network Information
Display network information.
• When you press ENTER during display of the notification message, the “Add New Feature” screen is displayed. (Refer to page 86 for more information on “Add New Feature”)
• Press RETURN to erase the notification message.
Username / Password / Account Number / Merge / Clear
• For character input, see page 65.
Username / Password
• For character input, see page 65.
Friendly Name / DHCP= ON/OFF / IP Address / MAC Address
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Manual Setup
Zone Setup
Default settings are underlined.
Set the audio to play back with multi-zone (ZONE2, ZONE3).
Setting items
Bass
Adjust low frequency range
(bass).
Treble
Adjust high frequency range
(treble).
HPF
Make settings for cutting the low range to reduce distortion in the bass.
Level Lch
Adjust the left channel output level.
Level Rch
Adjust the right channel output level.
Channel
Set the signal output from multi-zone.
Volume Level
Set the volume output level.
–10dB – +10dB (0dB)
–10dB – +10dB (0dB)
ON : The low range is attenuated.
OFF : The low range is not attenuated.
–12dB – +12dB (0dB)
“Stereo“.
Setting details
The “Level Lch” can be set when “Channel“ (vpage 83) is set to
“Stereo“.
–12dB – +12dB (0dB)
The “Level Rch” can be set when “Channel“ (vpage 83) is set to
Stereo : Select stereo output.
Mono : Select mono output.
Variable : Volume adjustment is enabled by main unit and remote control unit.
–40dB (41) : Fix volume at –40 dB. Set when adjusting volume by external amplifier.
0dB (81) : Fix volume at 0 dB. Set when adjusting volume by external amplifier.
Volume Limit
Make a setting for maximum volume.
When “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) is set to “ZONE2” or “ZONE3”, the
“Volume Level” setting is automatically set to “Variable”.
OFF : Do not set a maximum volume.
–20dB (61) / –10dB (71) / 0dB (81)
• This can be set when the multi-zone “Volume Level” setting (vpage 83) is “Variable”.
• This is displayed from 0 to 99 when “Volume Display” (vpage 84) is set to “Absolute”.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 83
Remote control operation buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
83
2010/08/23 18:33:15
ENGLISH DEUTSCH
Manual Setup
Setting items
Power On Level
Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.
Mute Level
Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
Setting details
Last : Use the memorized setting from the last session.
– – – (0) : Always mute when power is turned on.
–80dB – 18dB (1 – 99) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.
• This can be set when the multi-zone “Volume Level” setting (vpage 83) is “Variable”.
• This is displayed from 0 to 99 when “Volume Display” (vpage 84) is set to “Absolute”.
Full : The sound is muted entirely.
–40dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
–20dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.
NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Option Setup
Default settings are underlined.
Make various other settings.
Setting items
Volume Control
Set the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.
Setting details
Volume Display : Set how volume is displayed.
• Relative : Display ---dB (Min), in the range –80.5 dB – 18 dB.
• Absolute : Display in the range 0 (Min) – 99.
Source Delete
Remove from the display input sources that are not used.
GUI
Make the settings related to displays on the TV screen.
• The “Volume Display” setting is applied also to the “Volume Limit” and
“Power On Level” display method.
• The “Volume Display” setting applies to all zones.
Volume Limit : Make a setting for maximum volume.
• OFF : Do not set a maximum volume.
• –20dB (61) / –10dB (71) / 0dB (81)
Power On Level : Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.
• Last : Use the memorized setting from the last session.
• – – – (0) : Always use the muting on condition when power is turned on.
• –80dB – 18dB (1 – 99) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.
Mute Level : Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
• Full : The sound is muted entirely.
• –40dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
• –20dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.
BD / DVD / VCR / SAT / GAME / AUX1 / NET/USB /
TV / CD / CDR / PHONO / SIRIUS / HD Radio /
M-XPort : Select input source that is not used.
• ON : Use this source.
• Delete : Do not use this source.
NOTE
• Input sources being used in the various zones cannot be deleted.
• Input sources set to “Delete” cannot be selected using SOURCE SEL .
Screensaver : Make screensaver settings.
• ON : The screensaver is activated during menu display, NET/USB, iPod,
SIRIUS or HD Radio screen display if no operation is performed for an approximately 3-minute continuous period. When you press uio p , the screensaver is cancelled and the screen before that screen saver started is displayed.
• OFF : Screensaver is not activated.
84
Remote control operation buttons
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 84
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
2010/08/23 18:33:15
Setting items
GUI
(Continued)
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
Setting details
Wall Paper : Set wallpaper to display in the background when playback is stopped, etc.
• Picture : Set the background to a picture (Marantz logo).
• Black : Set the background to black.
Format : Set the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.
• NTSC : Select NTSC output.
• PAL : Select PAL output.
“Format” can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu screen is not displayed.
1. Press and hold the main unit’s and RETURN
A-DSX
for at least 3 seconds.
“Video Format” appears on the display.
2. Press o format.
p and set the video signal
3. Press the main unit’s or
ENTER , MENU
RETURN to complete the setting.
NOTE
When a format other than the video format of the connected TV is set, the picture will not be displayed properly.
Text : Display the details of operation when switching surround mode, input mode, etc.
• ON : Turn display on.
• OFF : Turn display off.
Master Volume : Display the master volume during adjustment.
• Bottom : Display at the bottom.
• Top : Display at the top.
• OFF : Turn display off.
When the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed on movie subtitles, set to “Top”.
NET/USB : Set the NET/USB screen display time when the input source is “NET/USB”.
• Always : Show display continuously.
• 30sec : Show display for 30 seconds after operation.
• 10sec : Show display for 10 seconds after operation.
• OFF : Turn display off.
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Manual Setup
GUI
Setting items
(Continued)
Component 2 Output
Set whether to use the component 2 output terminal as MAIN ZONE or
ZONE2.
Zone Rename
Change the display title of each zone to one you prefer.
Trigger Out
Select the condition for activating Trigger Out 1/2 for the input source, surround mode, etc.
See “DC OUT (TRIGGER
OUT) jacks” (vpage 54) for more information on trigger out.
Setting details
TUNER : Set the tuner screen display time when the input source is
“SIRIUS” or “HD Radio”.
• Always : Show display continuously.
• 30sec : Show display for 30 seconds after operation.
• 10sec : Show display for 10 seconds after operation.
• OFF : Turn display off.
iPod : Set the iPod screen display time when the input source is “NET/
USB”.
• Always : Show display continuously.
• 30sec : Show display for 30 seconds after operation.
• 10sec : Show display for 10 seconds after operation.
• OFF : Turn display off.
MAIN ZONE : Use the component 2 output terminal as a monitor output for MAIN ZONE.
ZONE2 : Use the component 2 output terminal as a monitor output for
ZONE2.
• Up to 10 characters can be input.
• For character input, see page 65.
Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2 n When setting for zone (MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3)
Trigger out is activated through linkage to the power of the zone set to “ON”.
n When setting for input source
Activate trigger out when the input source set to “ON” is selected.
Active for the zone set to “ON” with “When Setting for Zone”.
n When setting for HDMI monitor
Activate trigger out when the HDMI monitor set to “ON” is selected.
Active when the “MAIN ZONE” set to “ON” with “When Setting for Zone” is selected, and when the input source set to “ON” with
“When Setting for Input Source” is selected.
• ON : Activate trigger on this mode.
• – – – : Do not activate trigger on this mode.
Default : The “Trigger Out” settings are returned to the default settings.
• Yes : Reset to the defaults.
• No : Do not reset to the defaults.
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 85
Remote control operation buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
85
2010/08/23 18:33:15
ENGLISH
Manual Setup
Setting items
Display
Set the display on/off setting.
DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO
Setting details
ON : Display is always on.
Display Auto OFF : Display is off except when showing the status display.
Display OFF : Display is always off.
This can also be set by pressing
DISPLAY .
Each time DISPLAY is pressed, the setting is changed as shown below.
ON Display Auto Off
Display OFF
ESPAÑOL
Setup Lock
Protect settings from inadvertent change.
ON : Turn protection on.
OFF : Turn protection off.
When canceling the setting, set “Setup Lock” to “OFF”.
NOTE
When “Setup Lock” is set to “ON”, the settings listed below can no longer be changed. Also, “SETUP LOCKED!” is displayed if you attempt to operate related settings.
· Menu operations
· M-DAX
· Dynamic Volume®
· Channel Level
· MultEQ® XT
· Dynamic EQ®
Maintenance Mode
Use when receiving maintenance from a Marantz service engineer or custom installer.
NOTE
Only use this function if so instructed by a Marantz serviceperson or installer.
NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Setting items
Firmware Update
Update the firmware of this unit.
Setting details
Check for Update : Check for firmware updates. You can also check approximately how long it will take to complete an update.
Start : Execute the update process.
When updating starts, the power indicator becomes red and the menu screen is shut down. The amount of update time which has elapsed is displayed.
When updating is complete, the power indicator becomes green and normal status is resumed.
Add New Feature
Display new features that can be downloaded to this unit and perform an update.
• If updating fails, the set automatically retries, but if updating is still not possible, one of the messages shown below is displayed. If the display reads as shown below, check the settings and network environment, then update again.
Display
Updating fail
Login failed
Server is busy
Connection fail
Download fail
Description
Updating failed.
Failure to log into server.
Server is busy. Wait a while then try again.
Failure in connecting to server.
Downloading of the firmware has failed.
Upgrade : Execute the upgrade process.
When updating starts, the power indicator becomes red and the menu screen is shut down. The amount of update time which has elapsed is displayed.
When upgrading is complete, the power indicator becomes green and normal status is resumed.
• If the upgrade is not successful, an error message identical to those in
“Firmware Update” will appear on the display. Check the settings and network environment, then update again.
Upgrade Status : Display a list of the additional functions provided by the upgrade.
See the Marantz website for details about updates.
When the procedure is complete, “Registered” is displayed in this menu and updates can be carried out. If the procedure has not been carried out, “Not Registered” is displayed.
The ID number shown on this screen is needed when carrying out the procedure.
The ID number can also be displayed by pressing and holding o and RETURN for at least 3 seconds.
86
Remote control operation buttons
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 86
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
2010/08/23 18:33:16
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
Manual Setup
Notes concerning use of “Firmware Update” and “Add New Feature”
• In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system requirements and settings for a broadband Internet connection (vpage 24).
• Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrating is completed.
• Even with a broadband connection to the Internet, approximately 1 hour is required for the updating/ upgrading procedure to be completed.
• Once updating/upgrade starts, normal operations on this unit cannot be performed until updating/ upgrading is completed.
• Furthermore, updating/upgrading the firmware may reset the backup data for the parameters, etc. set for this unit.
• The following backup data may be erased after an update or upgrade.
• Internet radio preset channel
• Internet radio Recently Played data
• Username registered for Flickr Contact
• Data in Internet radio, media server and USB memory device
• If the update or upgrade fails, press and hold the ON/STANDBY on the main unit for more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord. “Update retry” appears on the display and update restarts from the point at which update failed. If the error continues despite this, check the network environment.
• Information regarding the “Firmware Update” function and “Add New Feature” will be announced on the Marantz web site each time related plans are defined.
• When usable new firmware is released with “Firmware Update” or “Add New Feature”, a notification message is displayed on the menu screen. When you do not want to be notified, set “Update Notification”
(vpage 83) and “Upgrade Notification” (vpage 83) to “OFF”.
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 87
Remote control operation buttons
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
87
2010/08/23 18:33:16
ENGLISH
Information
DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
Show information about this unit settings, input signals, etc.
Items
Status
Show information about current settings.
Audio Input Signal
Show information about audio input signals.
Setting details n MAIN ZONE
This item shows information about settings for MAIN ZONE.
The information displayed differs according to the input source.
Select Source / Name / Surround Mode / Input Mode /
Decode Mode / HDMI / Digital / Component / Video Select /
Video Mode / Content Type / Video Convert / i/p Scaler /
Resolution / Progressive Mode / Aspect etc.
n ZONE2
This item shows information about settings for ZONE2.
Power / Select Source / Volume Level n ZONE3
This item shows information about settings for ZONE3.
Power / Select Source / Volume Level
Surround Mode : The currently set surround mode.
Signal : The input signal type.
fs : The input signal’s sampling frequency.
Format : The number of channels in the input signal (front, surround, LFE).
Offset : The dialogue normalization correction value.
Flag : This is displayed when inputting signals including a surround back channel. “MATRIX” is displayed with Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES Matrix signals, “DISCRETE” with DTS-ES Discrete signals.
Dialogue normalization function
This function is automatically activated when playing Dolby Digital sources.
It automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program sources.
The correction value can be checked using the STATUS .
NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Items
HDMI Information
Show information about
HDMI input/output signals and monitor.
Preset Channel
Show information about preset channels.
NET/USB SIRIUS
HD Radio
Setting details
HDMI Signal Information
• Resolution / Color Space / Pixel Depth
HDMI Monitor 1 Information / HDMI Monitor 2 Information
• Interface / Supported resol.
“HDMI Monitor 1 Information” or “HDMI Monitor 2 Information” displays information on the HDMI monitor currently being used.
A / B / C / D / E / F / G
A1 – A8 / B1 – B8 / C1 – C8 / D1 – D8 / E1 – E8 / F1 – F8 / G1 – G8
The figure is the corrected value.
This cannot be changed.
88
Remote control operation buttons
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 88
Move the cursor
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Confirm the setting Return to previous menu
2010/08/23 18:33:16
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO
Other settings
Remote control settings
• When you connect a remote control receiver unit (purchased separately) to the REMOTE CONTROL IN terminal of this unit, use the following procedure to disable the remote sensor function of this unit.
• The remote sensor function of remote control signals is enabled by default.
ON/STANDBY
Switches light illumination on/off
You can switch the lighting around the main display on or off.
• The factory setting is “ON”.
FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
DISPLAY
STATUS ENTER n
Disabling the sensor function of the remote control unit
When the main unit is in standby mode, press ON/
STANDBY while holding down STATUS and ENTER on the main unit.
“Remote Lock:ON” is shown on the display, and the infrared light receiving function is disabled.
Press and hold DISPLAY on the main unit for 3 seconds.
• Carry out the same procedure if you want to change the settings again. n
Enabling the remote sensor function
When the main unit is in standby mode, press ON/
STANDBY while holding down STATUS and ENTER on the main unit.
The infrared light receiving function on the main unit is enabled.
NOTE
If a remote control receiver unit (purchased separately) is not connected, do not perform this setting. If you do, you will not be able to operate this unit using the remote control unit.
89
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 89 2010/08/23 18:33:16
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Operating the connected devices by remote control unit
Registering the supplied preset codes in the remote control unit enables you to operate devices made by other manufacturers.
Operating AV equipment
1 Press the input source select
button (vpage 25).
The remote control operating mode switches as shown in the table below, and the mode name is shown in the remote control display.
NOTE
Press the input source select buttons once to switch the operation mode of the remote control unit supplied with this unit.
Press the input source select buttons twice consecutively to switch the operation mode of the remote control unit and input source of this unit.
Input source select buttons z
Input source of this unit
Devices controllable with the remote control unit
(Operation mode)
BD Device registered on the BD button z DVD
VCR
Device registered on the DVD button
Device registered on the VCR button z SAT
GAME
Device registered on the SAT button
Device registered on the GAME button z z
AUX1
NET/USB
TV
CD
CDR
SIRIUS
Device registered on the AUX1 button
• Network function
• iPod or USB memory device connected to the USB port
Device registered on the TV button
Device registered on the CD button
Device registered on the CDR button
SIRIUS Satellite Radio
HD Radio HD Radio receiver
M-XPort Device registered on the M-XP button z If a preset code is registered for this button, the remote control unit of this unit can control another devices.
NOTE
If the mode of the remote control unit is set to other than ampoperation mode, press AMP to switch the remote control unit to the amp-operation mode to perform the following operations:
• For menu operation by pressing MENU
• For setting the channel level of the unit by pressing CH LVL
• For performing direct playback
• For switching Audyssey DSX™, MultEQ XT®, Dynamic EQ® and
Dynamic Volume® settings.
• For using the Video Select function.
• For using the sleep timer function.
• For displaying the Source Select screen.
• For switching the M-DAX function.
• For directly selecting “AUTO” and “STEREO” of the listening modes .
2 Operate this unit or the device whose input source is switched.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions for each device.
For operations of iPod and HD Radio receiver, see the following pages.
• iPod (vpage 28)
• HD Radio receiver (vpage 34)
90
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 90 2010/08/23 18:33:17
Registering preset codes
When preset codes are registered in the included remote control unit, it can then be used to operate any devices you have, such as DVD players or TVs made by different manufacturers.
NOTE
• No preset codes other than registered.
BD , DVD , TV , SAT and CD can be
• In the factory settings, remote control codes for all Marantz products are registered. n
Buttons used for operating the devices
q
SOURCE ON/OFF w e
For switching power of each device on or off.
uio p , ENTER
For menu operation of each device.
MENU , SETUP , TOP MENU
For displaying the menu of each device.
r 1 , 2 , 3 , 6 , 7 , 8 , 9 t Number button ( 0 – 9 , +10 ) y u
PRESET + , PRESET –
TV POWER , TV INPUT
For operating a TV .
This button is enabled in any mode.
For details on operation with the remote control unit, see pages
28 – 43, 92.
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO
Registering preset codes
The following two methods can be used for registering the reset code. q Entering a 4-digit code w Scanning the code table
Entering a 4-digit code
See the preset code list table for the code to be input.
1 Press and hold down the input source select buttons for the appliance to control, and press
SET until indicator blinks twice.
The back light flashes.
2 Press the 4-digit code for the appliance using the numeric buttons (code table at the end of this book).
• The 4-digit code is shown in the remote control display.
• When the settings are complete, “OK” is shown in the remote control display.
• If “NG” is displayed in the remote control display, repeat steps 1 and 2, and enter the same code again.
FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH
1 Switch the power on of the device for which you want to set the preset code.
2 Press and hold down the input source select buttons for the appliance to control, and press
SET until indicator blinks twice.
The back light flashes.
3 Aim the remote control at the appliance and slowly alternate between pressing and appliance.
INPUT
SOURCE ON/OFF
d
for the
The preset code is shown in the remote control display.
4 Stop when the appliance turns off.
5 Press ENTER once to lock in the code.
Check the registered preset code
1 Press and hold down the input source select buttons for appliance to control, and press
SET until indicator blinks twice and back light flashes.
The back light flashes.
2 Press SEARCH/INFO .
The display flashes twice, after which the set code is shown for 3 seconds in the remote control display.
ENGLISH
91
2010/08/23 18:33:17 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 91
ENGLISH DEUTSCH
Registering preset codes
Default settings for preset codes
The devices shown below are registered for each input source button as default. Settings can be changed according to the devices to be used.
1 Press and hold down the input source select buttons for appliance to control and press
SET until indicator blinks twice.
The back light flashes.
2 Enter the appropriate preset code
(4 digits) from the table below.
The display flashes twice.
Input source select buttons
Category
Preset code
Blu-ray Disc player
DVD player
5000
2000
Television
Satellite set top box
CD player
1000
4000
3000
NOTE
After this procedure, the selected source reset to its initial code.
FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Operating components
The supplied remote control unit can control a component other than this unit.
1 Switch the input source
(vpage 25).
2 Operate the component.
• For details, refer to the component’s operating instructions.
n
Blu-ray Disc player / HD-DVD player /
DVD player / DVD recorder operation
Operation buttons
SOURCE ON/OFF
MENU
TOP MENU uio p
ENTER
6 7
1
8 9
3
2
0 – 9
CLR
TV POWER
TV INPUT
Function
Power on/standby
(Popup) Menu
Top menu
Cursor operation
Enter
Manual search
(fast-reverse/fast-forward)
Playback
Auto search (cue)
Pause
Stop
Select title, chapter or channel selection
Clear the inputting
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz) n
CD player / CD recorder operation
Operation buttons
SOURCE ON/OFF
6 7
1
8 9
3
2
CLR
TV POWER
TV INPUT
Function
Power on/off
Manual search
(fast-reverse/fast-forward)
Playback
Auto search (cue)
Pause
Stop
Clear the inputting
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz) n
TV operation
Operation buttons
SOURCE ON/OFF
CHANNEL +, –
CLR
TV POWER
TV INPUT
Function
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch channels (up/down)
Clear the inputting
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
92
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 92 2010/08/23 18:33:18
Operating components n
Set top box for satellite (SAT) operation
Operation buttons
SOURCE ON/OFF
CHANNEL +, – uio p
ENTER
0 – 9
CLR
TV POWER
TV INPUT
Function
Power on/standby
Switch channels (up/down)
Cursor operation
Enter
Channel selection
Clear the inputting
TV power on/standby
(Default : Marantz)
Switch TV input
(Default : Marantz)
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO
Operating learn function
• If the AV device is not a Marantz device, or if the device does not operate even when the preset code is registered, use the learning function. Remote codes for different devices can be remembered for use by the Marantz remote control included with this device.
• This remote control unit is capable of learning around 160 codes.
Remembering remote control codes from other devices
1 Place the Marantz remote control and remote control from the other device approximately 5 cm apart, with the remote control signal transmission sections facing each other.
5 cm
FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
5 Press and hold the button that you want to register on the other remote control until “OK” is displayed on the Marantz remote control display.
• If “NG” is shown on the remote control display, perform step 5 again. If “NG” is shown again on the remote control display, the remote control may not be able to learn the code correctly. In this case, use the specialized remote control for the device.
• If the remote control memory becomes full, “FULL” is shown on the remote control display. If you want to learn the code, you should erase other learned button.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to learn other buttons for the same input source.
7 Repeat steps 3 to 6 to learn other input sources.
8 When programming of the remote control unit is completed, press SET .
The LEARN display disappears, and the remote control unit exits learn mode.
2
3
Press and hold down SET and
SOURCE SEL until the LEARN indicator blinks.
Press input source select buttons to select the input source.
The input source is shown in the remote control display.
4 Select the button to be learned.
LEARN indicator lights up.
NOTE
• The learning function is unavailable for all SOURCE ON/OFF , MACRO and HDMI in any mode.
• The learning function is unavailable for all buttons in TUNER mode,
AMP mode, NET/USB mode and M-XP mode.
• The learning procedure does not operate correctly if the batteries have become worn.
• If no buttons are pressed for approximately 1 minutes while in the
LEARN mode, the remote control unit automatically exits from the
LEARN mode.
93
2010/08/23 18:33:20 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 93
ENGLISH DEUTSCH
1 Press and hold down SET and
SOURCE SEL until the LEARN indicator blinks.
2 Press input source select buttons to select the input source you want to delete.
The input source is shown in the remote control display.
3 Press and hold down HDMI and press the learned button to be erased twice.
“ERASE” is shown in the remote control display, and the mode returns to learning mode.
• To return the normal mode, press SET .
FRANÇAIS ITALIANO
Operating learn function
Delete saved remote control codes
Codes can be erased in three ways: by buttons, sources, and by all memory contents.
n
Delete remote control codes for each button
ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS n
Delete remote control codes for all input sources
1 Press and hold down SET and
SOURCE SEL until the LEARN indicator blinks.
2 Press and hold down HDMI press ON and STANDBY
LEARN indicator lights.
.
and
3 Press ENTER to continue erasing.
“ERASE” is shown in the remote control display, and the mode returns to learning mode.
• To cancel the erasing operation, do not press ENTER and simply press any other button.
• To return the normal mode, press SET .
SVENSKA
NOTE
Erasing codes will return to the factory preset code, or there will leave empty if the button has no factory preset code.
n
Delete remote control codes for each input source
1 Press and hold down SET and
SOURCE SEL until the LEARN indicator blinks.
2 Press and hold down HDMI and press the learned input source select buttons to be erased twice.
“ERASE” is shown in the remote control display.
3 Press ENTER to continue erasing.
The indicator blinks twice and the mode returns to LEARN mode.
• To cancel the erasing operation, do not press ENTER , and simply press any other button.
• To return the normal mode, press SET .
94
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 94 2010/08/23 18:33:20
Operating macro function
• When the macro function is used, operations that usually require a complicated series of multiple button operations can be performed easily just by pressing the MACRO button.
• This device can remember up to 6 macro functions.
• Each macro can record a maximum of 10 steps.
[Example] To playback a DVD q Turn this unit’s power on
↓ w Switch this unit's input source to DVD
↓ e Turn the TV’s power on
↓ r DVD Playback
Recording macro operations
[Example] Recording DVD playback operations to the number “1” button
1 Press and hold SET and MACRO together until “MACRO” flashes in the LEARN indicator,
MACRO indicator and remote control display.
2 Press the macro operation number (“ record to.
1 ”) that you want to
“M1-01” is shown in the remote control display.
• If the number that you want to record to has already been recorded to, the recorded number flashes in the display.
3 Press the input source switch button (“ DVD ”) of the operation that you want to record along with the command button (“ 1 ”).
The macro operation step number is shown in the remote control display.
• To record the amp input source, press input source switching button.
AMP first, followed by the
SVENSKA
4
NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO
When the macro operation recording is complete, press and hold ENTER until the LEARN indicator and MACRO indicator switch off.
NOTE
The RETURN , uio p, ENTER , VOLUME + , – and CLR buttons cannot be recorded as macro operations.
Checking recorded macro operations
[Example] Checking the recorded macro operations to button “ 1 ”
1 Press and hold MACRO and
MENU together until “MACRO” flashes in the LEARN indicator,
MACRO indicator and remote control display.
2 Press the number button (“ 1 ”) that you want to check.
The LEARN indicator, MACRO indicator and “M1-01” flashes in the remote control display.
3 Press the VOLUME +, – .
• The LEARN indicator switches off, and “M1-01” is shown in the remote control display.
• The recorded macro operation is performed.
4 Repeat step 3 until the final number of the macro operation is displayed.
• The display returns to that of step 1.
• When the macro operation number is displayed, the corresponding macro operation is performed.
5 When the macro operation check is complete, press and hold off.
ENTER until the MACRO indicator switches
FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Editing recorded macro operations
[Example] Changing macro operation “
“
1 ” recorded on number button
1 ” to “ 3 ”, and changing the number button to“ 2 ”
1 Press and hold MACRO and
MENU together until “MACRO” flashes in the LEARN indicator,
MACRO indicator and remote control display.
2 Press the number button (“ 1 ”) that you want to change.
The LEARN indicator, MACRO indicator and “M1-01” flashes in the remote control display.
3 Press ui to select the macro operation button (“ 2 ”) to edit.
After the macro operation button is displayed, the recorded operation is performed.
• When the macro operation is updated as a recorded step, press the input source switching button, and then press the new step button (“ 2 ”).
• To insert a new macro operation between recorded steps, after performing step 3, press button (“ 2 ”).
MEMORY and then press the new step
When a new step is introduced, if the total number of steps is already 10, the 10th step is deleted after the new step is introduced.
• To delete recorded macro operations, after step 3, call the step number that you want to delete, and press CLR .
• To return to step 1, press ENTER .
4 When the macro operation edit is complete, press and hold ENTER until the MACRO indicator switches off.
95
2010/08/23 18:33:21 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 95
ENGLISH DEUTSCH
Operating macro function
Using macro operations
[Example] Using the recorded macro operations to button “ 1 ”
1
Press the MACRO.
“MACRO” is shown in the MACRO indicator and remote control display.
2 Press the number button (“ 1 ”) that you want to use.
Macro operations recorded to number button “ 1 ” are performed one at a time.
• The step number shown in the remote control display disappears after the step is performed.
• When all macro operations are completed, the remote control returns to the amp operation mode.
FRANÇAIS
Deleting recorded macro operations
[Example] Deleting the macro operations recorded to button“ 2 ”
1 Press and hold MACRO and
MENU together until “MACRO” flashes in the LEARN indicator,
MACRO indicator and remote control display.
2 Press and hold CLR and the number ( “2” ) that you want to delete for approximately 3 seconds.
“M2-CL” flashes in the remote control display.
3 Press the ENTER .
The recorded macro operation is deleted, and the remote control returns to step 1.
• To cancel the macro delete operation, press a different button without pressing ENTER .
4 When the macro operation delete is complete, press and hold switches off.
ENTER until the MACRO indicator
ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS
Adjusting the interval time of macro operations transmitting
The macro operation transmission interval can be adjusted.
• The factory setting is “1 second”.
1 Press and hold MACRO and
SOURCE SEL until “SETUP” is shown in the remote control display.
“SETUP” is shown for 3 seconds in the remote control display, after which
“MCR05z” is displayed. z The current transmission interval is shown.
2 Press o interval.
p to change to the desired transmission
• The interval time can be changed from 0.5 to 5 seconds by 0.5 seconds step.
3 When the adjustment is complete, press and hold
ENTER until the MACRO indicator switches off.
SVENSKA
Setting the back light
Press the Light button on the side of the remote control, and the buttons on the remote control light for 2 seconds. If the Light button is pressed while the buttons are lit, the buttons remain lit for another
2 seconds.
• Backlight is set on in the factory settings. n
Disabling the backlight
Press and hold both SET and
STANDBY until indicator flashes twice. n
Turning the backlight on
Press and hold both SET and until indicator flashes twice.
ON
96
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 96 2010/08/23 18:33:21
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 97
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS
Information
Information
Here, we list various information related to this unit.
Please refer to this information as needed.
DEUTSCH ENGLISH
F
Part names and functions vpage 98
F
Other information vpage 103
F
Troubleshooting vpage 112
F
Specifications vpage 116
F
Index vpage 117
2010/08/23 18:33:22
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS
Part names and functions
ITALIANO
Front panel
For buttons not explained here, see the page indicated in parentheses ( ).
ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
G With the door openH
W2 W1 W0 Q9 Q8 u y t r
Q7 Q6 Q5 Q4
W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 E0 E1 E2 E3 i o Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 q w e q Power operation button
(ON/STANDBY) ······································ (7, 12)
Turns power to this unit on and off (standby).
w Power indicator ·········································· (12) e Door
When you are using buttons and/or terminals behind the door, press the bottom of the door to open it. When not using buttons and/or terminals behind the door, close it. Be careful not to catch your fingers when closing the door.
r VOLUME control knob ······························· (26) t Remote control sensor ···························· (102) y Main display ················································ (99) u INPUT SELECTOR knob ····························· (25) i Headphones jack
When the headphones are plugged into this jack, audio will no longer be output from the connected speakers or from the PRE OUT connectors.
NOTE
To prevent hearing loss, do not raise the volume level excessively when using headphones.
o SETUP MIC jack ······································ (9, 52)
Q0 iPod/USB port ············································ (20)
Q1 HDMI connector ·········································· (16)
Q2 DIGITAL connector ····································· (19)
Q3 AUX1 INPUT connectors ··························· (19)
Q4 RETURN button ·································· (64 – 66)
Q5 ENTER button ····································· (64 – 66)
Q6 Cursor buttons (uio p) ·················· (64 – 66)
Q7 MENU button ·············································· (66)
Q8 Sub display ················································· (99)
Q9 Audyssey DSX™ button (A-DSX) ············· (75)
W0 M-DAX button / indicator ·························· (76)
W1 PURE DIRECT button / indicator ··············· (46)
W2 Dynamic EQ®/Dynamic Volume® button
(DYNAMIC EQ/VOL) ··································· (74)
W3 SURROUND MODE button ························ (44)
W4 AUTO button ································ (44, 60, 115)
W5 DISPLAY button ···································· (60, 86)
W6 STATUS button ·········································· (88)
W7 Speaker A/B switching button
(SPKR A/B) ·················································· (26)
W8 HDMI OUT button ······································ (16)
W9 ZONE SELECT button ································ (62)
E0 ZONE2 ON/OFF button ······························ (62)
E1 ZONE3 ON/OFF button ······························ (62)
E2 SLEEP button ·············································· (56)
E3 BAND button ·············································· (32)
98
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 98 2010/08/23 18:33:22
Display
Main Display
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL
Sub Display
Q6 Q5
ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH
Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1 Q0 o i u r
ENGLISH q w e r t y q w e q Light illumination
When the power to this device is switched on, the surrounding area is lit blue. The settings can be changed so the light does not switch on (vpage 89 “Switches light illumination on/off”).
w Master volume indicator e Input source indicator
The currently selected input source name is displayed.
If the input source name has been changed using “Input Setup” –
“Rename” (vpage 71) in the menu, the input source name after the change is displayed.
q Input signal indicators w Input signal channel indicators
These light when digital signals are input.
When playing HD Audio sources, the indicator lights when a signal from an extension channel (a channel other than the front, center, surround, surround back or LFE channel) is input.
If there are two or more extension channels, the indicators light.
and e Information display
The input source name, surround mode, setting values and other information are displayed here.
r Surround back/front height/front wide channel indicators
When audio is output from the surround back channels, the “SB”,
“SBL” or “SBR” indicator lights. When audio is output from the front height channels, the “H” indicator lights. When audio is output from the front wide channels, the “W” indicator lights.
t Front speaker indicator
This lights according to the setting of the front A and B speakers.
y Monitor output indicator
These light according to the HDMI monitor output setting.
u Master volume indicator i MUTE indicator
This lights when the mute mode is select (vpage 26).
o AUDYSSEY indicators
Lighting is as follows, depending on the setting of “Dynamic EQ®”
(vpage 74) and “Dynamic Volume®” (vpage 75).
When “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” are
“ON”.
When “Dynamic EQ” is “ON” and “Dynamic
Volume” is “OFF”.
When “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” are
“OFF”.
Q0 Sleep timer indicator
This lights when the sleep mode is selected (vpage 56).
Q1 Multi-zone indicators
This lights up when ZONE2, ZONE3 (separate room) power is turned on (vpage 62).
Q2 Input mode indicators
Set the audio input modes for the different input sources (vpage 71).
Q3 HDMI indicator
This lights when playing using HDMI connections.
Q4 Tuner reception mode indicators
These light according to the reception conditions when the input source is set to “HD Radio”.
STEREO : In the FM mode, this light when receiving stereo broadcasts.
TUNED : Lights when the broadcast is properly tuned in.
AUTO : This light when in the auto tuning mode.
Q5 Decoder indicators
These light when the respective decoders are operating.
Q6 HD indicator
This light during HD Radio reception.
99
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 99 2010/08/23 18:33:23
ENGLISH DEUTSCH
Rear panel
See the page indicated in parentheses ( ).
Q7 Q6 Q5 Q4 Q3
FRANÇAIS
Q2 Q1
ITALIANO
Q0
ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA o
Q8
Q7 i q w e r t y u q RS-232C connector ·································································· (54) w HD Radio antenna terminals ·················································· (22) e Analog audio connectors ···········································(17 – 21, 23) r UNBALANCED PRE OUT terminals ········································· (6) t 7.1CH INPUT connectors ························································ (23) y BALANCED PRE OUT terminals ··············································· (6) u AC inlet (AC IN) ·········································································· (7) i COMPONENT VIDEO connectors ····································(17 – 19) o HDMI connectors ····································································· (16)
Q0 Digital audio connectors ··················································(17 – 21)
Q1 NETWORK connector ······························································ (24)
Q2 FLASHER IN jack
Used when using a control BOX or other such control devices to control this unit.
Q3 REMOTE CONTROL jacks ······················································· (53)
Q4 M-XPort jack ············································································ (23)
Q5 SIRIUS connector ···································································· (22)
Q6 DC OUT jacks ··········································································· (54)
Q7 VIDEO connectors ····························································(17 – 19)
Q8 SIGNAL GND terminal ···························································· (21)
NOTE
Do not touch the inner pins of the connectors on the rear panel.
Electrostatic discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.
100
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 100 2010/08/23 18:33:24
SVENSKA
Remote control unit
For buttons not explained here, see the page indicated in parentheses ( ).
Q7 q w e r t
Q8
Q9
W0 q w e r
NEDERLANDS y u i o
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
R4
R5
W9
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
R0
R1
R2
R3
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH q Display r indicator ················································· (91) w SOURCE power button ·················· (62, 92, 93) e SET button ······································ (91, 93, 95) r HDMI button ········································· (16, 94) t Input mode button (A/D) ··························· (71) y Input source select buttons ······················· (25) u Source select button (SOURCE SEL) ········ (25) i INPUT buttons (d, f) ····················· (25, 62, 91) o DISPLAY/
Tuner mode (T.MODE) button ············ (32, 86)
Q0 SHIFT/TOP MENU button ·············· (33, 36, 65)
Q1 Cursor buttons (uio p) ·················· (64 – 66)
Q2 MENU button ·············································· (66)
Q3 MACRO button ··········································· (95)
Q4 Number buttons ······················· (33, 36, 91, 95)
Q5 Clear button (CLR) ······································ (96)
Q6 TUNING buttons (+, –) ······························· (32)
Q7 Remote control signal transmitter
Q8 Power buttons (ON, STANDBY) ············ (7, 12)
Q9 Speaker A/B button (SPKR A/B) ··············· (26)
W0 TEST TONE button ····································· (79)
W1 Muting button (MUTE) ······························ (26)
W2 Light button ················································ (96)
W3 Master volume control buttons
(VOLUME +, –)· ··········································· (26)
W4 Surround mode (SURR.) /
MEMORY button ···························· (33, 36, 44)
W5 SEARCH/
Information (INFO) button ······· (27, 31, 33, 66)
W6 ENTER button ····································· (64 – 66)
W7 RETURN button ·································· (64 – 66)
W8 System buttons
························· (28, 29, 36 – 38, 40, 42, 43, 92)
• Pause button (3)
• Play button (1)
• Stop button (2)
• Skip buttons (8, 9)
• Search buttons (6, 7)
FM/AM band switching button (BAND) ··· (34)
W9 STEREO button ··········································· (46)
E0 AUTO buttons ······························· (44, 60, 115)
E1 MULTEQ® button ······································· (74)
E2 Audio delay button (A.DELAY) ·················· (76)
E4 Channel level button (CH LVL) ·················· (56)
E5 SLEEP button ·············································· (56)
E6 INSERT button ············································ (65)
E7 DELETE button ··········································· (65)
E8 Pure direct button (P.DIRECT) ··················· (46)
E9 REPEAT button ····································· (28, 29)
R0 RANDOM button ·································· (28, 29)
R1 Audyssey DSX button (A-DSX) ················· (75)
R2 Dynamic EQ®/Dynamic Volume® button
(DYN EQ/VOL) ······································ (74, 75)
R3 Video select button (V.SEL) ······················ (69)
R4 TV operation buttons
(TV POWER / INPUT) ··························· (92, 93)
R5 CHANNEL/
PRESET buttons (+, –) ·············· (33, 36, 92, 93)
101
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 101 2010/08/23 18:33:25
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS
Remote control unit
Inserting the batteries
q Remove the rear lid in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
w Load the two batteries properly as indicated by the marks in the battery compartment.
R03/AAA
ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Operating range of the remote control unit
Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.
30°
30°
Approx. 23 ft / 7 m e Put the rear cover back on.
NOTE
• Insert the specified batteries in the remote control unit.
• Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not operate even when the remote control unit is operated close to the unit. (The supplied batteries are only for verifying operation.)
• When inserting the batteries, be sure to do so in the proper direction, following the q and w marks in the battery compartment.
• To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
• Do not use a new battery together with an old one.
• Do not use two different types of batteries.
• Do not attempt to charge dry batteries.
• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or dispose of batteries in flames.
• Do not keep the battery in a place exposed to direct sunlight or in places with extremely high temperatures, such as near a heater.
• If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery compartment and insert new batteries.
• Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long periods.
• Used batteries should be disposed of in accordance with the local regulations regarding battery disposal.
NOTE
The set may function improperly or the remote control unit may not operate if the remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight, strong artificial light from an inverter type fluorescent lamp or infrared light.
102
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 102 2010/08/23 18:33:25
Other information
n Trademark information (vpage 103) n Surround (vpage 104) n Relationship between video signals and monitor
output (vpage 108) n Explanation of terms (vpage 109)
Trademark information
This product uses the following technologies:
Manufactured under license from
Audyssey Laboratories™. U.S. and foreign patents pending. Audyssey
MultEQ® XT is a registered trademark of Audyssey Laboratories. Audyssey
Dynamic EQ® is a registered trademark of Audyssey Laboratories.
Audyssey Dynamic Volume® is a registered trademark of Audyssey
Laboratories. Audyssey Dynamic
Surround Expansion™ is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories.
DLNA®, the DLNA Logo and DLNA
CERTIFIED® are trademarks, service marks, or certifi cation marks of the
Digital Living Network Alliance.
Device Class: DMP (Digital Media
Player)
DLNA Certifi ed® Product Function:
FINDS, PLAYS
Content Type: audio, images, videos
(Check supported media formats.)
DLNA consumer website: www.dlna.
org
Some content may not be compatible with other DLNA Certifi ed® products
(example: optional media formats)
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro
Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under
U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616;
6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929;
7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD,
DTS-HD Master Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software. © DTS,
Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Manufactured under license from
DTS Licensing Limited. DTS and the
Symbol are registered trademarks,
& DTS Neural Surround and the DTS logos are trademark of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software. © DTS,
Inc. All Rights Reserved.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo and High-
Defi nition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United
States and other countries.
HD Radio™ Technology
Manufactured Under License From iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign
Patents. HD Radio™ and the
HD Radio logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifi cally to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certifi ed by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffl e, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• Individual users are permitted to use iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffl e, and iPod touch for private copy and playback of non-copyrighted contents and contents whose copy and playback is permitted by law. Copyright infringement is prohibited by law.
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
Service not available in Alaska and
Hawaii.
This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi
Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited
103
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 103 2010/08/23 18:33:26
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Surround
This unit is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit that lets you play program sources in the surround mode to achieve the same sense of presence as in a movie theater.
Surround modes and parameters
This table shows the speakers that can be used in each surround mode and the surround parameters adjustable in each surround mode.
Symbols in the table
S This indicates the audio output channels or surround parameters that can be set.
D This indicates the audio output channels. The output channels depend on the settings of “Speaker Config.” (vpage 78).
Channel output
Surround mode (vpage 44) Front
L/R
Center
Surround
L/R
Surround back
L/R
Front height
L/R
Front wide
L/R
PURE DIRECT (2channel)
PURE DIRECT (Multi-channel)
DIRECT (2channel)
DIRECT (Multi-channel)
STEREO
MULTI CH IN
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g A-DSX
DTS NEO:6
DTS NEO:6 A-DSX
Audyssey DSX
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
DOLBY TrueHD
DTS SURROUND
DTS 96/24
DTS-HD
DTS Express
MULTI CH STEREO
NEURAL
DOLBY VIRTUAL SPEAKER
DOLBY HEADPHONE
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Dz1
Dz1
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Dz1
Dz1
D
Dz2
Dz2
Dz2
D
D
D
D
D
D
D z 1 A signal for each channel contained in an input signal is output as audio.
z 2 If “Audyssey DSX” (vpage 75) is set to “ON–Height–”, sound is output from the front height speakers.
z 3 If “Audyssey DSX” (vpage 75) is set to “ON–Wide–”, sound is output from the front wide speakers.
z 4 Only when “Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE+Main” (vpage 79), sound is output from the subwoofer.
z 5 For HD Audio whose sampling frequency of an input signal is more than 96 kHz, this sound parameter cannot be set.
z 6 This item can be selected when a Dolby TrueHD signal is played.
z 7 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is played.
z 8 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal or DVD-Audio is played.
Dz1
Dz1
Dz3
Dz3
Dz3
Subwoofer
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Dz4
D
Dz4
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
HT-EQ z 5
(vpage 73)
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Surround Parameter (vpage 73)
DRC z 6
(vpage 73)
S
D. Comp z 7
(vpage 73)
S
S S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
LFE z 8
(vpage 73)
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
104
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 104 2010/08/23 18:33:26
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL
Surround mode (vpage 44) Height Gain
(vpage 73) Panorama
(vpage 73)
Surround Parameter (vpage 73)
PRO LOGIC g/gx Music mode only
Dimension
(vpage 73)
C.Width
(vpage 73)
NEO:6 Music mode only
C.Image
(vpage 73)
PURE DIRECT (2 channel)
PURE DIRECT (Multi-channel)
DIRECT (2 channel)
DIRECT (Multi-channel)
STEREO
MULTI CH IN
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g A-DSX
DTS NEO:6
DTS NEO:6 A-DSX
Audyssey DSX
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
DOLBY TrueHD
DTS SURROUND
DTS 96/24
DTS-HD
DTS Express
MULTI CH STEREO
NEURAL
DOLBY VIRTUAL SPEAKER
DOLBY HEADPHONE
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S z 9 This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” (vpage 74) is set to “ON”.
z 10 For HD Audio whose sampling frequency of an input signal is more than 96 kHz, this sound parameter cannot be set.
z 11 This item cannot be set when “MultEQ XT” (vpage 74) is set to “OFF” or “Manual”.
z 12 This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” (vpage 74) is set to “OFF”.
z 13 This item can be set when the input signal is analog, PCM 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz.
Tone z 9
(vpage 73)
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Surround
Audyssey Settingsz10 (vpage 74)
MultEQ® XT
(vpage 74)
Dynamic EQ® z 11
(vpage 74)
Dynamic Volume® z 12
(vpage 75)
Audyssey DSX™
Soundstage z 10
(vpage 75)
M-DAX z 13
(vpage 76)
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 105
105
2010/08/23 18:33:26
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Surround n
Types of input signals, and corresponding surround modes
This table shows the input signal that can be played in each surround mode. Check the audio signal of the input source then select the surround mode.
Symbols in the table
S This indicates the selectable surround mode.
Surround mode (vpage 44) NOTE
ANALOG
PCM
LINEAR PCM
(multi ch)
LINEAR PCM
(2ch)
DTS-HD
Master
Audio
DTS-HD
DTS-HD
High
Resolution
Audio
DTS
EXPRESS
DTS SURROUND
DTS-HD MSTR
DTS-HD HI RES
DTS ES DSCRT6.1
DTS ES MTRX6.1
DTS SURROUND
DTS 96/24
DTS (–HD) + PLgx MOVIE
DTS (–HD) + PLgx MUSIC
DTS (–HD) + PLgz
DTS EXPRESS
DTS (–HD) + NEO:6
DTS NEO:6 CINEMA
DTS NEO:6 MUSIC
DTS NEO:6 CINEMA A-DSX
DTS NEO:6 MUSIC A-DSX
Audyssey DSX
DOLBY SURROUND
DOLBY TrueHD
DOLBY DIGITAL+
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY (D+) (HD) +EX
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgx MOVIE
DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgx MUSIC
DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgz
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx MOVIE
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx MUSIC
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx GAME
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MOVIE
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MUSIC
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g GAME z z z z z
5
5 z 1z3 z 1z3
5 z 5 z 2z3
1z3 z 4 z 5 z 1z3 z 5
5 z 5 z 5 z 1z3 z 1z3 z 5 z 2z3 z 1z3 z 4 z 1z3 z 1z3 z 1z3 z 4 z 5 z 5 z 5
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S z 1 If “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” (vpage 78) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z 2 If “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” (vpage 78) is set to “1spkr” or “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z 3 This surround mode can be selected when “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) is set to “Normal”.
z 4 If “Speaker Config.” – “F.Height” (vpage 78) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z 5 The same was when “Audyssey DSX™” (vpage 75) setting is set to “ON”.
DTS ES
DSCRT
(With Flag)
S
S
S
S
S
S
Input signal types and formats
DTS
DTS ES
MTRX
(With Flag)
DTS
(5.1ch)
DTS 96/24
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
DOLBY
TrueHD
DOLBY
DOLBY
DIGITAL Plus
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With no
Flag)
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(5.1/5/4ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(4/3ch)
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(2ch)
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
106
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 106 2010/08/23 18:33:26
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH
Surround mode (vpage 44) NOTE
ANALOG
PCM
LINEAR PCM
(multi ch)
LINEAR PCM
(2ch)
DTS-HD
Master
Audio
DTS-HD
DTS-HD
High
Resolution
Audio
DTS
EXPRESS
DOLBY SURROUND
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MOVIE A-DSX
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MUSIC A-DSX
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g GAME A-DSX
Audyssey DSX
DOLBY VIRTUAL SPEAKER
DOLBY HEADPHONE
MULTI CH IN
MULTI CH IN
MULTI CH IN + PLgx MOVIE
MULTI CH IN + PLgx MUSIC
MULTI CH IN + PLgz
MULTI CH IN + Dolby EX
MULTI CH IN 7.1
Audyssey DSX
DIRECT
DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
MULTI CH STEREO
STEREO
STEREO
NEURAL
NEURAL
AUTO
AUTO z z z z
5 z 2z3 z 1z3
4
3
3
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S (7.1)
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S z 1 If “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” (vpage 78) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z 2 If “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” (vpage 78) is set to “1spkr” or “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z 3 This surround mode can be selected when “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) is set to “Normal”.
z 4 If “Speaker Config.” – “F.Height” (vpage 78) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z 5 The same was when “Audyssey DSX™” (vpage 75) setting is set to “ON”.
DTS ES
DSCRT
(With Flag)
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Input signal types and formats
DTS
DTS ES
MTRX
(With Flag)
DTS
(5.1ch)
DTS 96/24
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
DOLBY
TrueHD
DOLBY
DOLBY
DIGITAL Plus
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With no
Flag)
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(5.1/5/4ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(4/3ch)
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
ENGLISH
Surround
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(2ch)
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 107
107
2010/08/23 18:33:26
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO
Relationship between video signals and monitor output
3
4
1
2
13
14
15
16
17
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
18
19
20
21
Video Convert
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON z1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
HDMI
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
Input Signals
COMPONENT
A
A
A
S (1080p)
S (1080i ~ 480p)
S (480i/576i)
S (1080p)
S (1080p)
S (1080i ~ 480p)
S (480i/576i)
A
A
S
S
A
S
S
A
A
S
S
A
S
A
S
S
A
S
S
A
S
S Video signal input present
A No video signal input z 1 When no HDMI monitor is connected or the HDMI monitor’s power is not on
VIDEO
A
A
S
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
A
ZONE2 MONITOR OUT
Input Signals
COMPONENT VIDEO
Output Signals
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
A
A
S
A
A
A
S
S
S
A
S
S
S
A
S
ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS
MAIN ZONE MONITOR OUT
Output Signals
HDMI
Wall paper
COMPONENT
A
A
VIDEO
A
VIDEO
COMPONENT
–
COMPONENT
HDMI
A
A
A
HDMI
A No video signal output
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
A
COMPONENT
A
A
A
A
COMPONENT
SVENSKA
VIDEO
A
A
VIDEO
A
A
A
VIDEO
A
VIDEO
A
VIDEO
VIDEO
A
VIDEO
A
VIDEO
A
VIDEO
HDMI
Only the menu is displayed
S (VIDEO)
Menu displayed
COMPONENT
A z2
A z2
A (VIDEO) z3
A (COMPONENT) z2
A (COMPONENT) z3 S (COMPONENT)
–
A (COMPONENT)
S (VIDEO)
S (COMPONENT) A (COMPONENT) z3
A
A
VIDEO
A
A
(VIDEO)
A
(VIDEO)
A
S (HDMI)
A z2
A (VIDEO)
A
A (COMPONENT) z2
A z2
A (VIDEO)
A (VIDEO)
A
Only the menu is displayed
A (COMPONENT) z2
A z2
A (VIDEO)
A
A (VIDEO)
A
A (COMPONENT) z2
A (VIDEO)
S ( ) Superimposed on the picture indicated in ( ).
A ( ) Only the picture in ( ) is output.
A Neither the picture nor the menu is output.
z 2 Only the menu is displayed when no HDMI monitor is connected or the HDMI monitor’s power is not on.
z 3 If an HDMI monitor is not connected or power of an HDMI monitor is not turned on, the menu is superimposed on a video image in parenthesis.
• The main zone video conversion function is compatible with the following formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and
PAL-60.
• When SECAM signals of video input are up-converted, the signals are output in PAL format from the S-Video and Video connectors.
• The menu display cannot be superimposed when x.v.Color signals and computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) are input.
NOTE
• If you operate the menu while playing back 3D video content, the playback video is replaced by the menu screen. The playback video is not displayed behind the menu screen.
• This unit does not show the status display while playing back 3D video content.
108
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 108 2010/08/23 18:33:27
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
Explanation of terms
A
A2DP
A2DP is one profile of Bluetooth definded for in-car devices or AV devices that use wireless communication instead of a cable.
Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color
Like x.v.Color, each of these color spaces defines a palette of available colors that is larger than the traditional RGB color model.
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™
(A-DSX)
Realistic reproduction of sound relies on the ability of audio systems to match human hearing performance. Three key requirements are: (1) frequency response, (2) dynamic range, and (3) accurate spatial reproduction. The requirements for frequency response have already been surpassed with sampling rates that exceed human hearing.
The dynamic range limits of human perception have also been met with current digital audio systems operating capable of signal to noise ratios that approach 120 dB. Accurate spatial sound rendering, however, has not yet reached the limits of perception as human perception relies on the combination of sounds arriving from many more directions than what 5.1-channel surround sound systems provide. Audyssey DSX technology was developed to overcome the spatial sound rendering limitations faced by 5.1-channel surround sound formats.
The ITU 5.1-channel channel standard recommends three front loudspeakers and two rear loudspeakers.
The Left (L) and Right (R) front loudspeakers should be placed at ±30° relative to the central listening position. The Center (C) loudspeaker should be at
0° and the surround loudspeakers (SL, SR) should be placed between 100° and 120°. All loudspeakers must be equidistant from the center listening position or compensated with time delay if that is not possible. A separate low-frequency effects
(LFE) channel is used to reproduce additional bass content from the subwoofer.
There are certain things that 5.1-channel surround sound systems do well compared to 2-channel stereo. For example, it is possible to move sounds across the front seamlessly. It is also possible to create ambience behind the listener. But 5.1 channel surround systems do not provide enough channels from which to render the required refl ected sound components for a seamless and enveloping soundstage. Unfortunately, the additional two back surround channels in 7.1-channel systems are not in the right place to provide a significant perceptual improvement.
Adding more channels to a surround system is not for special effects. Accurate spatial sound reproduction requires rendering of directional sound cues and non-directional ambient cues.
Refl ections arriving after the direct sound play a critical role in the perception of soundstage width and depth. To have the most impact, additional surround channels should be used to control the direction, time of arrival, and frequency response of the refl ected sound to render an expanded soundstage that reproduces sound with better localization and envelopment than what 5.1-channel systems provide.
Research in the perception of auditory source width has shown that there are strong preferences in the direction of refl ected sound and the perception of soundstage width and spaciousness. The single most important direction of side-wall refl ections is ±60°. DSX provides a pair of Wide channels
(LW and RW) at ±60° with appropriate frequency response and perceptual processing to match the requirements of human hearing. In fact, the Wide channels are much more critical in the presentation of a realistic soundstage than then Back Surround channels found in traditional 7.1-channel systems. A more enveloping 7.1-channel system is one in which
Wide speakers are used instead of Back Surround speakers. Adding surround channels behind the listener has a very small impact compared to the increase in envelopment and soundstage width that the front wide channels will provide.
After side refl ections, the next most important acoustical and perceptual cues come from refl ections above the front stage. DSX provides a pair of Height channels (LH and RH) at a ±45° azimuth angle and elevated to a 45° angle in the median plane.
In addition to creating new Wide and Height channels, DSX also provides Surround Processing to enhance the envelopment of the Surround and
Back Surround channels (if present). DSX Surround
Processing processes the standard surround signals in the time and frequency domains to improve the perceived sense of envelopment and blending with the other speakers in the surround system.
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion is a scalable system that can adapt to the practical needs of the user. The first level of surround stage enhancement comes from adding the Wide channels. The second level comes from adding the Height channels. If it is practical to have both Wides and Heights then the surround performance will be further enhanced.
DSX automatically reconfigures its processing to optimize surround rendering over any number of available speakers beyond that of 5.1-channel.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ®
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics. Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ XT to provide well-balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.
Audyssey Dynamic Volume®
Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level between television programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog clarity remain the same.
Audyssey MultEQ® XT
Audyssey MultEQ XT is a room equalization solution that calibrates any audio system so that it can achieve optimum performance for every listener in a large listening area. Based on several room measurements, MultEQ XT calculates an equalization solution that corrects for both time and frequency response problems in the listening area and also performs a fully automated surround system setup.
Auto Lip Sync
If you connect this unit to a TV that supports the
Auto Lip Sync function, it can automatically correct delay between the audio and video.
B
Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a short-distance wireless communication technology used for connecting handheld devices several meters apart. This enables notebook computers, PDA s, mobile phones, etc. to connect without a cable for transmitting audio and data.
D
Deep Color
This technology allows expression of more number of colors than the conventional 8 bits and can reproduce colors close to natural ones without color streak.
DLNA
DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/ or service marks of Digital Living Network Alliance.
Some contents may not be compatible with other
DLNA CERTIFIED™ products.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Dolby Laboratories.
A total of 5.1 channels are played: 3 front channels
(“FL”, “FR” and “C”), 2 surround channels
(“SL” and “SR”) and the “LFE” channel for low frequencies.
Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic sound field with a “threedimensional” feeling (sense of distance, movement and positioning) is achieved.
A realistic, powerful sense of presence is achieved when playing movie sources in AV rooms as well.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX is a 6.1-channel surround format proposed by Dolby Laboratories that allows users to enjoy in their homes the “DOLBY DIGITAL
SURROUND EX” audio format jointly developed by
Dolby Laboratories and Lucas Films.
The 6.1 channels of sound, including surround back channels, provide improved sound positioning and expression of space.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is compatible with up to 7.1 channels of discrete digital sound and also improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance.
It is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby
Digital, so it offers greater flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the playback equipment.
109
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 109 2010/08/23 18:33:27
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
Explanation of terms
Dolby Headphone
The Dolby Headphone technology provides a surround sound listening experience over headphones.
When listening to multichannel content such as DVD movies over headphones, the listening experience is fundamentally different than listening to speakers. Since the headphone speaker drivers are covering the pinna of the ear, the listening experience differs greatly from traditional speaker playback. Dolby utilizes patented headphone perspective curves to solve this problem and provides a non-fatiguing, immersive, home theater listening experience. Dolby Headphone also delivers exceptional 3D audio from stereo material.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the sound of the studio master.
This format provides the facility to support up to
8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of
96kHz/24bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192kHz/24bit resolution. Dolby TrueHD is adopted for applications that put very high importance on sound quality.
Dolby Pro Logic g
Dolby Pro Logic g is a matrix decoding technology developed by Dolby Laboratories.
Regular music such as that on CDs is encoded into
5 channels to achieve an excellent surround effect.
The surround channel signals are converted into stereo and full band signals (with a frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater) to create a “three-dimensional” sound image offering a rich sense of presence for all stereo sources.
Dolby Pro Logic gx
Dolby Pro Logic gx is a further improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic g matrix decoding technology.
Audio signals recorded in 2 channels are decoded to achieve a natural sound with up to 7.1 channels.
There are three modes: “Music” suited for playing music, “Movie” suited for playing movies, and
“Game” which is optimized for playing games.
Dolby Pro Logic gz
Dolby Pro Logic gz introduces a new dimension to
Home Entertainment through the addition of a pair of front height channels. Compatible with stereo,
5.1-channel and 7.1-channel content, Dolby Pro
Logic gz provides enhanced spaciousness, depth and dimension to movies, concert video and video game playback while maintaining the full integrity of the source mix.
Dolby Pro Logic gz identifies and decodes spatial cues that occur naturally in all content, directing this information to the front height channels, complementing the performance of left and right surround sound speakers. Content that is encoded with Dolby Pro Logic gz height channel information can be even more revealing, with perceptually discrete height channel information bringing an exciting new dimension to home entertainment.
Dolby Pro Logic gz, with front height channels is also an ideal alternative for households that cannot support the placement of back surround speakers of a typical 7.1-channel system but may have bookshelf space available to support the addition of height speakers.
Dolby Virtual Speaker
Dolby Virtual Speaker is a technology certified by Dolby Laboratories that creates a virtualized surround sound experience from two speakers using a multichannel Dolby Digital source.
Additionally, Dolby Virtual Speaker can simulate the surround sound effect produced by Dolby Pro Logic or Dolby Pro Logic g.
Dolby Virtual Speaker retains all the original
Multichannel audio information and provides the listener with the sensation of being surrounded by additional speakers.
Downmix
This function converts the number of channels of surround audio to less number of channels and plays back.
DTS
This is an abbreviation of Digital Theater System, which is a digital audio system developed by DTS.
When playing back audio by connecting this system with a device such as DTS amplifier, accurate sound field position and realistic sound effect as if you are in a movie theater can be obtained.
NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in 5.1 channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization on DVD-Video.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS, Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to 5.1 channels of digital discrete surround sound.
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound.
Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format inserting a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.
DTS Express
DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit rates (max. 5.1 channels, 24 to 256 kbps).
DTS-HD
This audio technology provides higher sound quality and enhanced functionality than the conventional
DTS and is adopted as an optional audio for Blu-ray
Disc. This technology supports multi-channel, high data transfer speed, high sampling frequency, and lossless audio playback. Maximum 7.1-channels are supported in Blu-ray Disc.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional DTS, DTS-ES and
DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to
7.1 channels of discrete digital sound. High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound.
This format is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio format created by Digital Theater System (DTS). This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96kHz/24bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192kHz/24bit resolution.
It is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround
5.1-channel data.
DTS Neural Surround
DTS Neural Surround has been chosen as the surround sound format for XM Satellite Radio’s
“XM HD Surround”, TV sports broadcasting, 7.1 games, Music Direct Internet streaming as well as leading FM and HD Radio stations. It delivers the rich envelopment and discrete image detail of surround sound by unmasking the audio details, typically lost by other playback modes. Audiences will experience the deep ambience and subtle details of movies, music and games.
DTS NEO:6™ Surround
DTS NEO:6™ is a matrix decoding technology for achieving 6.1-channel surround playback with 2-channel sources. It includes “DTS NEO:6
Cinema” suited for playing movies and “DTS
NEO:6 Music” suited for playing music.
Dynamic range
The difference between the maximum undistorted sound level and the minimum discernible level above the noise emitted by the device.
F
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) is a codec for audio data compression.
H
HDCP
When transmitting digital signals between devices, this copyright protection technology encrypts the signals to prevent content from being copied without authorization.
HDMI
This is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, which is an AV digital interface that can be connected to a TV or amplifier. Video signal and audio signal can be connected using 1 cable.
110
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 110 2010/08/23 18:33:27
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
L
LFE
This is an abbreviation of Low Frequency Effect, which is an output channel that emphasizes low frequency effect sound. Surround audio is intensified by outputting 20 Hz to 120 Hz deep bass.
M
MAIN ZONE
The room where this unit is placed is called the
MAIN ZONE .
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3)
This is an internationally standardized audio data compression scheme, using the “MPEG-1” video compression standard. It compresses the data volume to about one eleventh its original size while maintaining sound quality equivalent to a music CD.
MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group), MPEG-2,
MPEG-4
These are the names for digital compression format standards used for the encoding of video and audio.
Video standards include “MPEG-1 Video”, “MPEG-
2 Video”, “MPEG-4 Visual”, “MPEG-4 AVC”. Audio standards include “MPEG-1 Audio”, “MPEG-2
Audio”, “MPEG-4 AAC”.
P
Pairing
Pairing is an operation required for settings to connect two Bluetooth devices. Pairing enables
Bluetooth devices to access each other.
Progressive (sequential scanning)
This is a scanning system of video signal that displays 1 frame of video as one image. Compared to the interlace system, this system provides images with less flickering and bleeding.
Protection Circuit
This is a function to prevent damage to components within the power supply when an abnormality such as an overload, excess voltage occurs or temperature for any reason.
In this unit, the power indicator blinks and the unit enters standby mode when an abnormality occurs.
S
Sampling frequency
Sampling involves taking a reading of a sound wave
(analog signal) at regular intervals and expressing the height of the wave at each reading in digitized format (producing a digital signal).
The number of readings taken in one second is called the “sampling frequency”. The larger the value, the closer the reproduced sound is to the original.
Speaker impedance
This is an AC resistance value, indicated in Ω
(ohms). Greater power can be obtained with this value smaller.
sYCC601 color
Like x.v.Color, each of these color spaces defines a palette of available colors that is larger than the traditional RGB color model.
V vTuner
This is a free online content server for Internet radio. Note that usage fees are included in upgrade costs.
For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site below.
vTuner website: http://www.radiomarantz.com
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Nothing Else Matters Software and
BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
W
WAV (Wave)
WAV is a standard audio format of Windows. The file size tends to increase, but sound near the original sound can be maintained.
Windows Media DRM
This is a copyright protection technology developed by Microsoft.
Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for Windows Media contained in this device (WM-DRM) to protect the integrity of their content (Secure Content) so that their intellectual property, including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated. This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure
Content (WM-DRM Software). If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this device has been compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure
Content Owners) may request that Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM Software’s right to acquire new licenses to copy, display and/or play Secure
Content. Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM
Software’s ability to play unprotected content.
A list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you download a license for
Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC.
Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license, also download revocation list onto your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners.
Windows Media Player Ver.11
This is a media player distributed free of charge by
Microsoft Corporation.
It can be used to play playlists created with
Windows Media Player Ver. 11 as well as files in such formats as WMA, DRM WMA, MP3 and WAV.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
This is audio compression technology developed by
Microsoft Corporation.
WMA data can be encoded using Windows
Media® Player Ver.7, 7.1, Windows Media®Player for Windows® XP and Windows Media® Player 9
Series.
To encode WMA files, only use applications authorized by Microsoft Corporation. If you use an unauthorized application, the file may not work properly.
Explanation of terms
X x.v.Color
This function lets HDTVs display colors more accurately. It enables display with natural, vivid colors. “x.v.Color” is a Sony registered trademark.
Z
ZONE2
This unit can operate in a room other than the room where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE2 playback). The room for ZONE2 playback is called
ZONE2.
ZONE3
This unit can operate in a room other than the room where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE3 playback). The room for ZONE3 playback is called
ZONE3.
111
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 111 2010/08/23 18:33:27
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
Troubleshooting
If a problem should arise, first check the following:
1. Are the connections correct?
2. Is the set being operated as described in the user guide?
3. Are the other components operating properly?
If this unit does not operate properly, check the items listed in the table below. Should the problem persist, there may be a malfunction.
In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase.
G GeneralH
Symptom
Power does not turn on.
Display is off.
Cause/Solution
• Check whether the power plug is correctly inserted into the power outlet.
• Set “Display” on the menu to something other than “OFF”.
Set does not operate properly.
• Reset the microprocessor.
G VideoH
Symptom Cause/Solution
No picture appears.
• Check the TV connection.
• Set the TV input correctly.
Page
7
86
115
Page
7
7
NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
G AudioH
Symptom Cause/Solution
Audio is not output.
• Check the connections for all devices.
• Check the speaker connections.
• Check whether the audio device power is turned on.
• Adjust the master volume.
• Cancel the mute mode.
• Select a suitable input source.
• Select a suitable input mode.
• Disconnect the headphones. No sound is output from the speakers or the PRE OUT connectors when headphones are connected.
No sound is produced from surround speaker.
• Check if the surround speakers are connected to the SURROUND terminals.
No sound is produced from surround back speaker.
No sound is produced from front height speaker.
No sound is produced from front wide speaker.
No sound is produced from subwoofer.
• Set “Amp Assign” on the menu to “Normal”.
• Set “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” on the menu to something other than “None”.
• Set the surround mode to something other than “STEREO”.
• Set “Amp Assign” on the menu to “Normal”.
• Set “Speaker Config.” – “F.Height” on the menu to something other than “None”.
• Set “Amp Assign” on the menu to “Normal”.
• Set “Speaker Config.” – “F.Wide” on the menu to something other than “None”.
• Check the subwoofer connections.
• Turn on the subwoofer’s power.
• Set “Speaker Config.” – “Subwoofer” on the menu to “Yes”.
• If “Front” and “Center” for “Speaker Config.” are set to “Large”, and “Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE”, no sound may be output from the subwoofers, depending on the input signal or selected surround mode.
• Set “Decode Mode” on the menu to “Auto” or “DTS”.
DTS sound is not output.
Dolby TrueHD, DTS-
HD, Dolby Digital
Plus audio is not output.
• Make HDMI connections.
Page
7, 16 – 24
6, 49 – 51
–
26, 62
26, 62
25, 62
71
98
–
78
78
44
78
78
78
79
6, 49 – 51
7
78
78, 79
71
16
112
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 112 2010/08/23 18:33:27
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
G HDMIH
Symptom
No audio is output with HDMI connection.
No video is output with HDMI connection.
When the following operations are performed on devices compatible with HDMI control, the same operations occur on this unit.
• Power ON/OFF
• Switching audio output devices
• Adjust volume
• Switch input source
Cause/Solution
• Check the connection of the HDMI connectors.
• When outputting HDMI audio from the speakers, set “HDMI
Audio Out” on the menu to “AMP”.
• When outputting HDMI audio from a TV, set “HDMI Audio Out” on the menu to “TV”.
• Check the connection of the HDMI connectors.
• Set the input source to match the connected HDMI connector.
• Check whether the TV is compatible with copyright protection
(HDCP). If connected to a device not compatible with HDCP, video will not be output correctly.
• Set “HDMI Control” on the menu to “OFF”. To operate power only for each device, set “Power Off Control” to “OFF”.
G SIRIUS Satellite RadioH
Symptom Cause/Solution
“CHECK SIRIUS
TUNER” is displayed.
”ANTENNA ERROR” is displayed.
”NO SIGNAL” is displayed.
”INVALID
CHANNEL” is displayed.
”ACQUIRING
SIGNAL” is displayed.
• The SiriusConnect Home Tuner unit is not connected. Check that the connections are correct.
• The antenna is not connected. Check that the connections are correct.
• The antenna is not connected. Check that the connections are correct.
• Channel is not present. Select another channel.
”Call SIRIUS” z is displayed.
• The signal cannot be received. Reposition your SiriusConnect
Home Tuner and Home Dock antenna.
• Displays while SiriusConnect Home Tuner is connected. Reposition your SiriusConnect Home Tuner and Home Dock antenna.
• Channels are not subscribed to. If you subscribe to the channel, you can receive the channel.
”SUBSCRIPTION
UPDATED” is displayed.
”Enter Lock Code
[ ]” is displayed.
• While updating contract information.
• Selected channels are locked. Please insert pass word (4 digits) into “[ ]” z After scroll displays “Call 888-539-....” twice, displays “Call SIRIUS”.
Page
16
80
80
16
16, 25
15
55, 81
Page
22
22
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
G HD Radio receiverH
Symptom
Reception fails, or there is a lot of noise or distortion.
Cause/Solution
• Change the antenna orientation or position.
• Separate the AM loop antenna from the unit.
• Use an FM outdoor antenna.
• Separate the antenna from other connection cables.
Page
22
22
22
22
G M-XPortH
Symptom
Audio is not output when a wireless receiver (RX101 is connected).
• Check that the Bluetooth device and Wireless receiver (RX101) are correctly paired.
Cause/Solution Page
–
G Internet radio / Media server / iPod / USB memory device / Flickr / Napster / Pandora / RhapsodyH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
When a USB memory device is connected, “USB” is not displayed on the menu.
Files on a USB memory device cannot be played.
The file names are not displayed properly (“...”, etc.).
Internet radio cannot be played.
• The set cannot recognize a USB memory device. Check the connection.
• A USB memory device not conforming to mass storage class or
MTP standards is connected. Connect a USB memory device conforming to mass storage class or MTP standards.
• A USB memory device that the set cannot recognize is connected.
This is not a malfunction. Marantz does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power.
• USB memory device is connected via USB hub. Connect the USB memory device directly to the USB port.
• USB memory device is in format other than FAT16 or FAT32.
Set the format to FAT16 or FAT32. For details, refer to the USB memory device’s operating instructions.
• USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions. When divided into multiple partitions, only files stored in the top partition can be played.
• Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record the files in a compatible format.
• You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this set.
• Characters that cannot be displayed are used. This is not a malfunction. On this set, characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with a “.”.
• Ethernet cable is not properly connected or network is disconnected. Check the connection status.
• Program is being broadcast in non-compatible format. Only
Internet radio programs in MP3 and WMA can be played on this set.
• The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated. Check the computer’s or router’s firewall settings.
• Radio station is not currently broadcasting. Choose a radio station that is currently broadcasting.
• IP address is wrong. Check the set’s IP address.
20
–
–
–
–
–
28
28
–
24
34
–
35
83
113
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 113 2010/08/23 18:33:27
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
Symptom
Files stored on a computer cannot be played.
Server is not found, or it is not possible to connect to the server.
Sound quality is poor or played sound is noisy.
Cannot login to Rhapsody.
(“Incorrect
Username or
Password” is displayed.)
Cannot compile
Playlist.
Cause/Solution
• Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record in a compatible format.
• You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this set.
• Set and computer are connected by USB cable. The set’s USB port cannot be used for connection to a computer.
• The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated. Check the computer’s or router’s firewall settings.
• Computer’s power is not turned on. Turn on the power.
• Server is not running. Launch the server.
• Set’s IP address is wrong. Check the set’s IP address.
• Connecting to the media server may take a few minutes the first time you attempt to make a connection.
• Some iPods do not support being used connected directly to the
USB port.
• “No Connection” may display if you connect an iPod that has only a small amount of charge remaining in its battery to this unit.
Should this occur, charge the iPod before connecting it to this unit. iPod cannot be played.
When an iPod is connected, “No
Connection” is displayed.
Cannot connect to preset or favorite radio stations.
For some radio stations, “Server
Full” or “Connection
Down” is displayed and station cannot be connected to.
Sound is broken during playback.
• Radio station is not currently broadcasting. Wait a while before trying again.
• Radio station is not currently in service. It is not possible to connect to radio stations that are no longer in service.
• Station is congested or not currently broadcasting. Wait a while before trying again.
• Network’s signal transfer speed is slow or communications lines or radio station is congested. This is not a malfunction. When playing broadcast data with a high bit rate, the sound may be broken, depending on the communications conditions.
• File being played has a low bit rate. This is not a malfunction.
• Login information is incorrect. Check if the Username for Rhapsody has been properly entered. Re-enter the Password. (Password is not displayed.) www.rhapsody.com/marantz
• This unit does not respond to playlist compilation. When the playlist is compiled in PC Application, it is registered to “My
Library”. In this way, the playlist can be played in this unit
20
–
–
–
–
–
–
83
–
–
–
–
83
–
Page
34
34
–
NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Symptom
Cannot delete
Rhapsody Channel registered in “My
Channels”
Cannot delete
Tracks, Playlists,
Channels registered in “My Library”
Cannot login to
Napster. (“Incorrect
Username or
Password” is displayed.)
Cannot login to
Pandora. (“Email address” or
“Password” is displayed.)
Cause/Solution
• Cannot be done with this unit. Delete from PC Application.
• Cannot be done with this unit. Delete from PC Application.
• Login information is incorrect. Check if the Username for Napster has been properly entered. Re-enter the Password. (Password is not displayed.) http://www.napster.com/choose/index_default.html
• Login information is incorrect. Check if the “Email address” for
Pandora has been properly entered. Re-enter the “Password”.
(Password is not displayed.) http://www.pandora.com/marantz
G Remote Control UnitH
Symptom
The set cannot be operated with the remote control unit.
Cause/Solution
• Batteries are worn out. Replace with new batteries.
• Operate the remote control unit within a distance of about 7 m from this unit and at an angle of within 30°.
• Remove any obstacle between this unit and the remote control unit.
• Insert the batteries in the proper direction, checking the q and w marks.
• The set’s remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb light, etc.). Move the set to a place in which the remote control sensor will not be exposed to strong light.
Page
–
–
83
40
Page
102
102
102
102
102
114
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 114 2010/08/23 18:33:27
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
Resetting the microprocessor
Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations cannot be performed.
When the microprocessor is reset, all the settings are reset to their default values.
Various setting details can be saved and reset on this device. If setting details are saved before returning to the default values, after returning to the default settings, setting details can be returned to the same values as before returning to the defaults.
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH
ON/STANDBY AUTO
SURROUND MODE
MENU
SLEEP
ENTER
1 When the power is ON, press and hold SLEEP and ENTER for more than 3 seconds.
After “MEMORY SAVING” is shown on the display, “COMPLETE”is shown to inform you that the settings have been saved.
2 Turn off the power using ON/STANDBY .
3 Press ON/STANDBY while simultaneously pressing SURROUND MODE and AUTO .
4 Once the display starts flashing at intervals of about 1 second, release the two buttons.
5 Press and hold SLEEP and MENU for more than 3 seconds.
After “MEMORY LOAD” is shown on the display, “COMPLETE” is shown to inform you that the settings have returned to those saved in step 1.
• To return all of the settings to the default values, perform steps 2 to 4 without performing step 1.
• If in step 3 the display does not flash at intervals of about 1 second, start over from step 1.
115
2010/08/23 18:33:27 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 115
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
Specifications
n Audio section
• Analog
Input sensitivity/Input impedance:
Frequency response:
S/N:
Distortion:
Rated output:
S/N:
Rated output:
Distortion factor:
200 mV/47 kΩ
10 Hz – 100 kHz — +1, –3 dB (DIRECT mode)
105 dB (IHF–A weighted, DIRECT mode)
0.005 % (20 Hz ~ 20 kHz) (DIRECT mode)
Unbalanced pre-output: 1.2 V
Balanced pre-output: 2.4 V
• Digital
D/A output:
Digital input:
Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)
Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB)
S/N ratio — 102 dB
Dynamic range — 100 dB
Format — Digital audio interface
• Phono equalizer (PHONO input — REC OUT)
Input sensitivity:
RIAA deviation:
2.5 mV
±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
74 dB (A weighting, with 5 mV input)
150 mV
0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V) n Video section
• Standard video connectors
Input/output level and impedance:
Frequency response:
• Color component video connector
Input/output level and impedance:
Frequency response:
1 Vp-p, 75 Ω
5 Hz – 10 MHz — +1, –3 dB
Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω
P
B
/ C
B
signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω
P
R
/ C
R
signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω
5 Hz – 60 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when “Video Convert” set to “OFF”)
NEDERLANDS SVENSKA n Tuner section
Receiving Range:
Usable Sensitivity:
S/N (IHF-A):
Total harmonic Distortion (at 1 kHz):
[FM]
(Note: μV at 75 Ω, 0 dBf = 1 x 10 –15 W)
87.5 MHz – 107.9 MHz
1.5 μV (14.8 dBf)
MONO 78 dB
STEREO 68 dB
HD 85 dB
MONO 0.1 %
STEREO 0.2 %
HD 0.02 %
530 kHz – 1710 kHz
18 μV
85 dB
0.02 %
[AM] n General
Power supply:
Power consumption:
Maximum external dimensions:
Weight: n Remote control unit (RC011SR)
Batteries:
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
60 W
0.2 W (Standby)
4.0 W (CEC standby)
440 (W) x 187 (H) x 395 (D) mm
10.1 kg
R03/AAA Type (two batteries)
For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.
116
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 116 2010/08/23 18:33:27
Index
v Numerics
2.1-channel ························································· 51
3D ······································································· 15
5.1-channel ··················································· 49, 50
6.1-channel ··················································· 48, 50
7.1-channel ··············································· 5, 48, 49 v A
A2DP ·························································· 23, 109
Accessories ·························································· 2
Add New Feature ··············································· 86
Adjust CH ··························································· 76
Adjusting the master volume ····························· 26
Adobe RGB color / Adobe YCC601 color ········· 109
A-DSX Soundstage ············································· 75
AM loop antenna ················································ 22
Amp Assign ························································ 78
Antenna Aiming ·················································· 68
ARC ···································································· 15
Aspect ································································ 70
Audio Adjust ······················································· 73
Audio cable ······················· 6, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 23
Audio Delay ························································ 76
Audio Setup ························································ 81
Audio/Video Adjust ············································· 72
Audyssey Auto Setup ····································· 8, 52
Audyssey DSX ···················································· 75
Audyssey Dynamic EQ ······························· 74, 109
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™
(A-DSX) ····························································· 109
Audyssey Dynamic Volume ······················· 75, 109
Audyssey MultEQ XT ··························· 74, 99, 109
Audyssey Settings ············································· 74
Auto Lip Sync ············································· 80, 109
Auto Preset ························································ 67
Auto Setup ····················································· 8, 52 v B
Base Curve Copy ················································ 76
Bass ····························································· 73, 83
Bass Setting ······················································· 79
Bi-amp ································································ 51
Bluetooth ···················································· 23, 109
Brightness ·························································· 77 v C
Cable
Audio cable ····················· 6, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 23
Coaxial digital cable ········································· 18
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
Component video cable ························ 17, 18, 19
Ethernet cable·················································· 24
HDMI cable ··················································· 7, 16
Optical cable ··································· 17, 19, 20, 21
Speaker cable ···················································· 6
Video cable ··········································· 17, 18, 19
Channel ······························································ 83
Channel Level ··············································· 56, 79
Characters ·························································· 65
Chroma Level ····················································· 77
C.Image ······························································ 73
Coaxial digital cable ············································ 18
Component 2 Output ········································· 85
Component video cable ························· 17, 18, 19
Condensation ······················································· 3
Connection
7.1CH INPUT terminal ······································ 23
Antenna ··························································· 22
Blu-ray Disc player ·································· 7, 16, 17
Cable TV ··························································· 18
CD player ························································· 20
CD recorder ····················································· 21
DC OUT (TRIGGER OUT) jacks ························ 54
Digital camcorder ······································· 16, 19
DVD player ················································· 16, 18
Game console ·················································· 16
HDMI ······························································· 15
HD Radio receiver ············································ 22
Home network (LAN) ······································· 24 iPod (USB) ························································ 20
Power cord ························································· 7
Record player ··················································· 21
Remote control jacks ······································· 53
RS-232C connector ·········································· 54
Satellite tuner ··················································· 18
Set-top box ················································ 16, 18
SIRIUS ····························································· 22
Speaker ························································ 5, 49
TV···························································· 7, 16, 17
USB memory device ········································ 20
Video cassette recorder ····························· 16, 19
Wireless receiver (RX101) ································ 23
Contrast ······························································ 77
Crossover Frequency ········································· 80
C.Width ······························································ 73 v D
D.Comp ······························································ 73
Decode Mode ···················································· 71
Deep Color ················································· 15, 109
Dimension ·························································· 73
Direct mode ······················································· 27
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS
Display ·························································· 86, 99
Distance ····························································· 79
DLNA ································································ 109
DNR ···································································· 77
Dolby
Dolby Digital············································· 45, 109
Dolby Digital EX ······································· 45, 109
Dolby Digital Plus ····································· 45, 109
Dolby Headphone ·····································46, 110
Dolby Pro Logic II ············································110
Dolby Pro Logic IIx ··········································110
Dolby Pro Logic IIz ····································48, 110
Dolby TrueHD ············································45, 110
Dolby Virtual Speaker ································46, 110
Downmix ·························································· 110
DRC ···································································· 73
DTS ···························································· 45, 110
DTS 96/24 ·················································45, 110
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 ·································45, 110
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 ····································45, 110
DTS-HD ·····················································45, 110
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio ······················110
DTS-HD Master Audio ····································110
DTS Digital Surround ······································110
DTS Express ···················································110
DTS NEO:6™ Surround ····························44, 110
DTS Neural Surround ································45, 110
Dynamic EQ ······················································· 74
Dynamic range ················································· 110
Dynamic Volume ················································ 75 v E
Enhancer ···························································· 77
EQ Customize ···················································· 81
Error messages (Auto Setup) ····························· 11
Ethernet cable ···················································· 24
DEUTSCH ENGLISH v H
HDCP ························································· 15, 110
HDMI ·························································· 15, 110
HDMI 1.4a ·························································· 15
HDMI Audio Out ················································ 80
HDMI cable ···················································· 7, 16
HDMI Control ··············································· 55, 80
HDMI Setup ······················································· 80
HD Radio reception ······································ 22, 32
Headphones ······················································· 98
Height Gain ························································ 73
HPF ···································································· 83
HT-EQ ································································· 73
Hue ····································································· 77 v I
Information ························································· 88
Audio Input Signal ············································ 88
HDMI Information ············································ 88
Preset Channel ················································ 88
Status ······························································· 88
Input Assign ······················································· 68
Input Mode ························································· 71
Input Setup ························································· 66
Input signal ················································· 45, 106
Inputting characters ··········································· 65
Interval ······························································· 72 i/p Scaler ····························································· 70 v L
Learn function ···················································· 93
Level Lch ···························································· 83
Level Rch ··························································· 83
LFE ····························································· 73, 111
Listening mode ·················································· 44
Listening position ················································· 8 v F
Fader function ···················································· 56
F.Height ······························································ 78
Firmware Update ··············································· 86
FLAC ································································ 110
Flickr ····························································· 35, 38
FM indoor antenna ············································· 22
Front A/B (connection) ································· 49, 51
Front height speaker ···································· 48, 49
Front Panel ························································· 98
Front wide speaker ······································ 48, 49
F.Wide ································································ 79 v G
GUI ····································································· 84 v M
Macro function ··················································· 95
Maintenance Mode ············································ 86
MAIN ZONE ····················································· 111
Manual EQ ························································· 76
Manual Setup ····················································· 77
Master volume display ······································· 85
M-DAX ································································ 76
Menu map ·························································· 63
Monitor Out ························································ 80
MP3 ·································································· 111
MPEG ······························································· 111
MPEG-4 AAC ···················································· 111
MultEQ XT ·························································· 74
117
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 117 2010/08/23 18:33:27
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS
Mute Level ························································· 84
M-XPort ······························································ 23 v N
Napster ························································· 35, 39
Network Setup ··················································· 81
Napster Account ·············································· 83
Network Connecting ········································ 81
Network Information ········································ 83
Other································································ 82
Rhapsody Account ··········································· 83 v O
Optical cable ····································· 17, 19, 20, 21
Option Setup ······················································ 84
Add New Feature ············································· 86
Component 2 Output ······································· 85
Display ····························································· 86
Firmware Update ············································· 86
GUI··································································· 84
Maintenance Mode·········································· 86
Setup Lock ······················································· 86
Source Delete ·················································· 84
Trigger Out ······················································· 85
Volume Control ················································ 84
Zone Rename ·················································· 85
ITALIANO ESPAÑOL
Rhapsody ························································· 42
SIRIUS ····························································· 30
Stereo ······························································ 46
USB memory device ········································ 28
WMA ························································· 28, 34
ZONE2 ····························································· 62
ZONE3 ····························································· 62
Playback Mode ··················································· 71
Power Off Control ·············································· 81
Power On Level ················································· 84
Preset codes ······················································ 91
Preset Name ······················································ 68
Preset Skip ························································· 67
Presetting radio stations ···································· 33
Progressive ······················································ 111
Progressive Mode ·············································· 70
Protection circuit ·············································· 111 v R
Random ······························································ 71
Rear panel ························································ 100
Reference Level Offset ······································ 74
Remote control settings ····································· 89
Remote control unit ··································· 90, 101
Inserting the batteries ···································· 102
Operating AV equipment ································· 90
Operating components ···································· 92
Registering Preset Codes ································ 91
Remote mode ···················································· 27
Rename ······························································ 71
Repeat ································································ 71
Resetting the microprocessor ·························· 115
Resolution ·························································· 70
RGB Range ························································· 80
Rhapsody ····················································· 35, 42 v P
Pairing ······························································ 111
Pandora ························································ 35, 40
Panel lock function ············································· 60
Panorama ··························································· 73
Parameter Check ················································ 12
Parental Lock ······················································ 67
Picture Adjust ····················································· 77
Playback
Blu-ray Disc player ··········································· 26
CD player ························································· 26
Direct ······························································· 46
DVD player ······················································· 26
Flickr································································· 38
HD Radio reception ·········································· 32
Internet radio ··················································· 35 iPod(USB) ························································· 27
Media server ···················································· 37
MP3 ··························································· 28, 34
MPEG-4 AAC ··················································· 34
Multi-channel ··················································· 44
Napster ···························································· 39
Network audio ················································· 34
Pandora ···························································· 40
Pure direct ······················································· 46
118 v S
Sampling frequency ········································· 111
S.Back ································································ 78
Screensaver ······················································· 84
Selecting the input source ································· 25
Setup Lock ························································· 86
SIRIUS ·························································· 22, 30
Sleep timer ························································· 56
Slide Show ························································· 72
Source Delete ···················································· 84
Source Level ······················································ 71
Speaker
Connect ··························································· 49
Install ··························································· 5, 48
Set up ·························································· 8, 52
Speaker cable ······················································· 6
NEDERLANDS SVENSKA
Speaker Config. ·················································· 78
Speaker impedance ·········································· 111
Speaker Setup ···················································· 78
Stage Height ······················································ 75
Stage Width ······················································· 75
Standby Source ·················································· 81
Still Picture ························································· 72
Subwoofer setting ················································ 9
Surround back speaker ······················· 5, 48, 49, 50
Surround Mode ·········································· 44, 104
Surround Parameter ··········································· 73
Switcheing the light illumination ························ 89
Switching the front speakers ····························· 26 sYCC601 color ·················································· 111 v T
Tone ··································································· 73
Tone Control ······················································· 73
Trademark ························································ 103
Treble ··························································· 73, 83
Trigger Out ························································· 85
Troubleshooting ··············································· 112
Turning off the sound temporarily ······················ 26
Turn off power (standby) ···································· 12
Turn on power ······················································ 7 v V
Video ·································································· 69
Video cable ············································· 17, 18, 19
Video conversion ················································ 14
Video Convert ····················································· 70
Video Mode ························································ 70
Video Select ······················································· 69
Volume Control ·················································· 84
Volume Level ····················································· 83
Volume Limit ················································ 83, 84 vTuner ······························································ 111 v W
WAV ································································· 111
Web control ························································ 58
Windows Media DRM ······································ 111
Windows Media Player Ver.11 ························· 111
Wireless LAN-compatible mobile terminal ········· 57
WMA ································································ 111 v X x.v.Color ····················································· 15, 111 v Z
ZONE2 ·················································· 61, 99, 111
ZONE3 ·················································· 61, 99, 111
Zone Rename ····················································· 85
Zone Setup ························································· 83
1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 118 2010/08/23 18:33:28
List of preset codes / Liste de codes préréglés / Lista de códigos pre-ajustados
Device select : BD
Blu-ray Disc Player
D Denon
H Hitachi
I Integra
5034, 5035, 5036
5031, 5032, 5033
5013
J JWC
5014, 5015, 5017, 5018,
5019, 5020
L LG
M Marantz
Mitsubishi
O Onkyo
P Panasonic
Philips
5010, 5011
5000, 5026, 5027
5024, 5025
5013
5001, 5002, 5003
5004
Pioneer
R RCA
S Samsung
Sharp
Sony
T Toshiba
Y Yamaha
5005
5012
5005
5028, 5029, 5030
5007, 5008, 5009, 5016
5012
5021, 5022, 5023
Device select : DVD
DVD Player
A
B BOSE
D Denon
F Funai
G GE
H Harman Kardon 2061
J
K
Aiwa
Apex
Hitachi
JVC
Kenwood
Koss
M Magnavox
Marantz
2036, 2037
2012, 2017, 2018, 2019,
2021, 2034
2038, 2039, 2063
2047, 2048
2049
2009, 2020, 2029, 2033
2008, 2012, 2031
2006, 2010, 2040, 2041,
2042, 2043
2053, 2054
2058
2007, 2011, 2023, 2025
2025, 2065
Marantz (Blu-ray)
Mitsubishi
O Onkyo
Oritron
P Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Proscan
2064
2011, 0215
2062
2009, 2030
2003, 2015, 2016, 2055
2007, 2011, 2058
2002, 2014, 2056
2009, 2020, 2032
R RCA
S Sampo
Samsung
Sanyo
Sharp
Sherwood
Sony
T Toshiba
Y Yamaha
Z Zenith
2005, 2009, 2020, 2035,
2057
2041
2008, 2012, 2022, 2024,
2027
2050, 2052
2044, 2045
2051
2001, 2013, 2059
2004, 2008, 2026, 2028
2046, 2060
2010
Device select : SAT
Satellite Receiver
A Alphastar
Amstrad
4027
4046, 4047, 4050
Atsky
B B Sky B
C Chaparral
D DIRECTV
E
DISH Network
Drake
Echostar
Eurosky
Express Vu
F Foxtel
Freesat
4048
4021, 4045, 4046
4039
4001, 4016, 4044
4030
4026
4007, 4017, 4018, 4019,
4020, 4062, 4063, 4064
4047, 4056
4017
4051
4056
Fujitsu
G GE
4025
4002, 4008, 4009
General Instruments 4036, 4037
Gradiente
H Hitachi
Hughes
4044, 4057
4001, 4015
J
Humax
Janeil
JVC
M Mitsubishi
N Nokia
O Optima
P Panasonic
Philips
Proscan
R Radio Shack
RCA
Realistic
Rural Cable
4001, 4016
4049, 4050, 4051, 4052,
4053
4025
4017
4001
4058, 4059, 4060, 4061
4048
4004, 4010
4031, 4035, 4044, 4057
4002, 4008, 4009, 4011
4036, 4037
4002, 4008, 4009, 4029
4040
4036
Television
A Acer
Admiral
Aiko
Aiwa
Akai
Amtron
Anam
Anam National
AOC
Audiovox
B Bell & Howell
Benq
Broksonic
C Celebrity
Citizen
Colortyme
Contec
Contec/Cony
Craig
Crown
Curtis Mathes
D Daewoo
Daytron
Dimensia
Dumont
S Samsung
Schneider
SKY
Skyplus
Skysat
Sony
Star Choice
Star Trak
STS
SuperDish
T Teac
Thomson
Toshiba
U Uniden
Universum
V Video Pall
Z Zenith
4022, 4027, 4042, 4043,
4050, 4054, 4055
4041, 4043
4044, 4045, 4057
4048
4041, 4047, 4056
4003, 4012, 4014, 4065,
4066, 4067
4032
4024
4038
4028
4049
4046, 4056
4001, 4034
4005, 4006, 4013
4056
4025
4023, 4025, 4033
Device select : TV
1141
1002, 1009, 1089
1059
1117, 1118
1001
1023
1113
1023, 1069, 1092
1003, 1024, 1049, 1127
1023
1009, 1025
1104, 1142
1003, 1097, 1098, 1113
1001
1003, 1013, 1023, 1026,
1059, 1063
1003, 1043
1113
1023, 1045, 1047
1020, 1022, 1023, 1113
1023, 1067
1003, 1013, 1025, 1026,
1062, 1103, 1110
1003, 1013, 1024, 1035,
1036, 1059, 1084, 1101
1003, 1013, 1016
1103, 1110
1003, 1010, 1153
E Electroband
Electrohome
Emerson
Envision
F Fisher
Fujitsu
Funai
G Gateway
GE
Goldstar
H Hallmark
Hisense
Hitachi
I Infi nity
J Janeil
JBL
JC Penney
Jensen
JVC
K Kawasho
Kenwood
Kloss Novabeam
KTV
L LG
M M.Wards
Magnavox
Marantz
Mitsubishi
Motorola
N NEC
NET-TV
O Orion
P Panasonic
Philips
1001
1001, 1003, 1069, 1133
1003, 1013, 1015, 1020,
1021, 1022, 1023, 1025,
1038, 1044, 1045, 1048,
1055, 1061, 1094, 1096,
1099, 1101, 1113
1003
1025, 1051, 1091, 1160
1038, 1124, 1125, 1155
1023, 1038, 1113
1150
1003, 1018, 1022, 1046,
1054, 1069, 1085, 1103,
1110, 1113, 1133, 1136,
1153
1003, 1013, 1024, 1030,
1045, 1080, 1100
1112, 1154
1003
1116
1003, 1012, 1031, 1032,
1037, 1041, 1045, 1047,
1065, 1068, 1082, 1088,
1094, 1139, 1140, 1145,
1159
1067
1134
1067
1003, 1013, 1018, 1019,
1024, 1026, 1046, 1047,
1054, 1063, 1083, 1085,
1100, 1103, 1110, 1112,
1133, 1154
1003
1028, 1029, 1045, 1047,
1050, 1060, 1065
1001, 1003
1003
1023, 1056, 1057, 1134
1013, 1023, 1033, 1034,
1073, 1099, 1113
1024, 1030
1002, 1009, 1038
1003, 1052, 1053, 1056,
1057, 1063, 1067, 1081,
1106
1003, 1031, 1067, 1122
1003, 1024, 1051, 1115,
1122, 1133
1014, 1069
1003, 1012, 1024, 1043,
1069
1137, 1150
1020, 1096
1017, 1067, 1069, 1095,
1111
1003, 1011, 1045, 1052,
1054, 1056, 1057, 1058,
1063, 1067, 1069, 1106
RCA
Realistic
Runco
S Sampo
Samsung
Sansui
Sanyo
Sharp
Signature
Sony
Soundesign
Starlite
Supre-Macy
Sylvania
Symphonic
T Tandy
Tatung
Technics
Techwood
Teknika
Telecaption
Toshiba
Totevision
U Universal
Pioneer
Plasmsync
Portland
Price Club
Prism
Proscan
Proton
Q Quasar
R Radio Shack
1003, 1018, 1037, 1070,
1071, 1094, 1145, 1147,
1149
1135
1003, 1013, 1024, 1059
1026
1018
1004, 1005, 1006, 1007,
1008, 1085, 1103, 1110
1003, 1045
1010, 1069, 1073, 1111,
1153
1003, 1013, 1015, 1023,
1024, 1025, 1045, 1100,
1103, 1110, 1113
1003, 1004, 1005, 1006,
1007, 1008, 1014, 1024,
1049, 1069, 1075, 1079,
1085, 1087, 1088, 1093,
1094, 1101, 1103, 1110,
1113, 1153
1013, 1015, 1023, 1025,
1045, 1100, 1103, 1110
1010, 1153
1150
1003, 1013, 1024, 1026,
1040, 1045, 1062, 1078,
1083, 1090, 1100, 1105,
1114, 1120, 1121, 1146,
1148, 1157
1119
1003, 1025, 1051, 1072,
1077, 1091, 1156, 1157,
1158
1003, 1013, 1014, 1015,
1045, 1055, 1064, 1066,
1076, 1089, 1123
1009
1001, 1102, 1108
1003, 1023, 1038, 1063,
1113
1023
1134
1003, 1039, 1042, 1052,
1053, 1056, 1057, 1063,
1067, 1089, 1151
1023, 1039, 1044
1014
1069
1018
1003, 1018
1003, 1009, 1013, 1023,
1024, 1026, 1038, 1045,
1047, 1059, 1063, 1111,
1113
1074
1003, 1019, 1025, 1026,
1042, 1074, 1098, 1107,
1111, 1135, 1136
1013
1046, 1054
PRESET CODE
1
4.AV7005U_BackPage.indd 1 2010/08/23 18:25:15
V Video Concepts 1113
W
Viewsonic
Wards
1006, 1022, 1109, 1128,
1129, 1130, 1131, 1138,
1143, 1145, 1150
1003, 1009, 1015, 1024,
1038, 1044, 1046, 1052,
1054, 1056, 1057, 1067,
1086, 1103, 1110
White
Westinghouse
Y Yamaha
Z Zenith
1001, 1101
1003, 1024
1003, 1009, 1010, 1132,
1144, 1153
Device select : CD
CD Player
A AIWA
AKAI
AUDIO
AUDIO LABS
C CALIFORNIA
CARVER
CASIO
CURTIS
D DENON
E EMERSON
F FISHER
G GE
GENEXXA
H HARMON
HITACHI
I INKEL
J JC PENNEY
JVC
K KARDON
KRELL
L LUXMAN
LX I
M MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MATHES
MCS
MGA
MISSION
MITSUBISHI
N NAD
NAKAMICHI
NEC MCS
NIKKO
O ONKYO
3001, 3002, 3003
3004, 3005, 3006
3007
3008
3008
3010, 3011, 3009
3012, 3020
3020, 3012
3013
3014
3011, 3015, 3016, 3017,
3018
3019
3014, 3021, 3020
3022, 3023, 3051
3020
3024
3012, 3020, 3025
3026, 3027
3022, 3051, 3023
3010
3035, 3036, 3037, 3038
3012, 3020, 3014
3010, 3039, 3040
3010, 3041, 3042, 3043
3012, 3020
3012, 3020
3023
3010
3023, 3044
3034, 3045
3046, 3047, 3048
3025
3007, 3016
3049, 3050, 3051, 3052,
3055, 3102, 3103
2
PRESET CODE
OPTIMUS
P PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
Q QUASAR
R RCA
REALISTIC
ROTEL
RS ORIGINAL
S SAE
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
SANYO
SCOTT
SEARS
SHARP
SHERWOOD
SHURE
SONY
SYLVANIA
SYMPHONIC
T TEAC
TECHNICA
THETA DIGITAL
TOSHIBA
V VICTOR
Y YAMAHA
Z ZENITH
3011, 3014, 3020, 3028,
3053, 3054, 3056, 3057,
3058, 3059
3008, 3060, 3061
3009, 3010, 3010, 3040
3020, 3021, 3062, 3063,
3064
3008
3011, 3014, 3065, 3066,
3067, 3068, 3069
3011, 3014, 3020, 3042,
3054, 3057
3010
3070
3010, 3083
3071
3014, 3068, 3072, 3073
3011, 3018, 3074, 3075,
3076
3014
3012, 3014, 3020, 3028,
3042
3028, 3042, 3077
3042, 3056, 3070, 3078,
3024
3025
3039, 3079, 3080, 3081,
3082, 3097, 3098, 3099,
3100, 3101
3010
3083
3016, 3042, 3057, 3083,
3084, 3085, 3086
3007, 3008, 3061, 3087,
3088
3040
3045
3026
3007, 3089, 3090, 3091,
3092
3016, 3093, 3094, 3095,
3096
4.AV7005U_BackPage.indd 2 2010/08/23 18:25:15
4.AV7005U_BackPage.indd 3 2010/08/23 18:25:15
4.AV7005U_BackPage.indd 4 2010/08/23 18:25:15
4.AV7005U_BackPage.indd 5
Dimensions / Dimensions / Dimensions
Unit : mm (in)
11.5 (1/2)
440.0 (17 3/8)
23.5 (15/16)
16.5 (11/16)
2010/08/23 18:25:16
4.AV7005U_BackPage.indd 6
D&M Holdings Inc.
Printed in China 5411 10549 026M
2010/08/23 18:25:16
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 5 Getting started
- 6 Accessories
- 6 About this manual
- 6 Features
- 7 Cautions on handling
- 18 Connections
- 18 Important information
- 19 Connecting an HDMI-compatible device
- 21 Connecting a TV
- 21 Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player
- 22 Connecting a DVD player
- 22 Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)
- 23 Connecting a video cassette recorder
- 23 Connecting a digital camcorder
- 24 Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port
- 24 Connecting a CD player
- 25 Connecting a CD recorder
- 25 Connecting a record player
- 26 Connecting an antenna
- 27 Connecting a wireless receiver (RX101)
- 27 Connect a device that has a multichannel output terminal
- 28 Connecting to a home network (LAN)
- 29 Playback (Basic operation)
- 29 Important information
- 30 Playing a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player
- 30 Playing a CD player
- 31 Playing an iPod
- 32 Playing a USB memory device
- 34 Tuning in radio stations
- 38 Playing a network audio
- 48 Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode)
- 48 Multi-channel playback
- 50 Stereo playback
- 50 Direct playback
- 50 Dolby Virtual Speaker/Dolby Headphone playback
- 52 Speaker installation/connection (Advanced connection)
- 52 Install
- 53 Connect
- 56 Set up speakers
- 57 Connections (Advanced connection)
- 57 REMOTE CONTROL jacks
- 58 RS-232C connector
- 58 DC OUT (TRIGGER OUT) jacks
- 59 Playback (Advanced operation)
- 59 Convenient functions
- 65 Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room)
- 65 Audio output
- 66 Video output
- 66 Playback
- 67 How to make detailed settings
- 67 Menu map
- 68 Examples of menu and front display
- 69 Inputting characters
- 70 Input Setup
- 76 Audio/Video Adjust
- 81 Manual Setup
- 92 Information
- 93 Other settings
- 93 Remote control settings
- 93 Switches light illumination on/off
- 94 Operating the connected devices by remote control unit
- 94 Operating AV equipment
- 95 Registering preset codes
- 96 Operating components
- 97 Operating learn function
- 99 Operating macro function
- 100 Setting the back light
- 102 Part names and functions
- 102 Front panel
- 103 Display
- 104 Rear panel
- 105 Remote control unit
- 107 Other information
- 107 Trademark information
- 108 Surround
- 112 Relationship between video signals and monitor output
- 113 Explanation of terms
- 116 Troubleshooting
- 119 Resetting the microprocessor
- 120 Specifications